MDS-C1 Series SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL bnp-c3040 (Eng) D

CNC
AC SERVO/SPINDLE
MDS-C1 Series
SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
BNP-C3040D(ENG)
MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Introduction
Thank you for selecting the Mitsubishi numerical control unit.
This instruction manual describes the handling and caution points for using this AC
servo/spindle.
Incorrect handling may lead to unforeseen accidents, so always read this instruction
manual thoroughly to ensure correct usage.
Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user.
Always store this manual in a safe place.
All specifications for the MDS-C1 Series are described in this manual. However, each
CNC may not be provided with all specifications, so refer to the specifications for the
CNC on hand before starting use.
Notes on Reading This Manual

(1) Since the description of this specification manual deals with NC in general, for the
specifications of individual machine tools, refer to the manuals issued by the
respective machine manufacturers. The "restrictions" and "available functions"
described in the manuals issued by the machine manufacturers have precedence
to those in this manual.
(2) This manual describes as many special operations as possible, but it should be
kept in mind that items not mentioned in this manual cannot be performed.
i
Precautions for safety
Please read this manual and auxiliary documents before starting installation, operation,
maintenance or inspection to ensure correct usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety
information and precautions before starting operation.
The safety precautions in this instruction manual are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
When there is a potential risk of fatal or serious injuries if

DANGER handling is mistaken.
When operator could be fatally or seriously injured if handling

WARNING
is mistaken.
When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken

CAUTION leading to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.
Note that some items described as CAUTION may lead to major results depending on
the situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.
The numeric control unit is configured of the control unit, operation board, servo drive unit,
spindle drive unit, power supply, servomotor and spindle motor, etc.
In this section "Precautions for safety", the following items are generically called the "motor".
• Servomotor
• Spindle motor
In this section "Precautions for safety", the following items are generically called the "unit".
• Servo drive unit
• Spindle drive unit
• Power supply unit
ii
WARNING
1. Electric shock prevention
Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this
could lead to electric shocks.
Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks.
Do not remove the front cover even when the power is OFF unless carrying out wiring work or
periodic inspections. The inside of the servo drive units is charged, and can cause electric
shocks.
Wait at least 15 minutes after turning the power OFF before starting wiring, maintenance or
inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
Ground the servo drive unit and servomotor with Class C (former class 3) grounding or
higher.
Wiring, maintenance and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician.
Wire the servo drive unit and servomotor after installation. Failure to observe this could lead
to electric shocks.
Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric
shocks.
Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Fire prevention
Install the servo drive units, servomotors and regenerative resistor on noncombustible
material. Direct installation on combustible material or near combustible materials could lead
to fires.
Shut off the power on the servo drive unit side if the servo drive unit fails. Fires could be
caused if a large current continues to flow.
When using a regenerative resistor, provide a sequence that shuts off the power with the
regenerative resistor's error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and
cause a fire due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
The battery unit could heat up, ignite or rupture if submerged in water, or if the poles are
incorrectly wired.
2. Injury prevention
Do not apply a voltage other than that specified in Instruction Manual on each terminal.
Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.
Do not mistake the terminal connections. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or
damage, etc.
Do not mistake the polarity ( + , – ). Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or
damage, etc.
The servo drive unit's fins, regenerative resistor and servomotor, etc., may reach high
temperatures while the power is ON, and may remain hot for some time after the power is
turned OFF. Touching these parts could result in burns.
iii
CAUTION
3. Various precautions
Observe the following precautions. Incorrect handling of the unit could lead to faults, injuries and
electric shocks, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
Correctly transport the product according to its weight.
Use the servomotor's hanging bolts only when transporting the servomotor. Do not transport
the servomotor when it is installed on the machine.
Do not stack the products above the tolerable number.
Do not hold the cables, axis or detector when transporting the servomotor.
Do not hold the connected wires or cables when transporting the servo drive units.
Do not hold the front cover when transporting the servo drive units. The unit could drop.
Follow this Instruction Manual and install in a place where the weight can be borne.
Do not get on top of or place heavy objects on the unit.
Always observe the installation directions.
Secure the specified distance between the servo drive unit and control panel's inner wall, and
between other devices.
Do not install or run a servo drive unit or servomotor that is damaged or missing parts.
Do not block the intake or exhaust ports of the servomotor provided with a cooling fan.
Do not let foreign objects enter the servo drive units or servomotors. In particular, if
conductive objects such as screws or metal chips, etc., or combustible materials such as oil
enter, rupture or breakage could occur.
The servo drive units and servomotors are precision devices, so do not drop them or apply
strong impacts to them.
iv
CAUTION
Store and use the units under the following environment conditions.
Conditions
Environment
Servo drive unit Servomotor
Ambient temperature 0°C to +55°C (with no freezing) 0°C to +40°C (with no freezing)
90%RH or less 80%RH or less
Ambient humidity
(with no dew condensation) (with no dew condensation)
Storage temperature –15°C to +70°C
Storage humidity 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Indoors (where unit is not subject to direct sunlight),
Atmosphere
with no corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist, or dust
Altitude 1,000m or less above sea level
Follows each specifications
Vibration 4.9m/s2 (0.5G) or less
manual
Securely fix the servomotor to the machine. Insufficient fixing could lead to the servomotor
slipping off during operation.
Always install the servomotor with reduction gear in the designated direction. Failure to do
so could lead to oil leaks.
Structure the rotary sections of the servomotor so that it can never be touched during
operation. Install a cover, etc., on the shaft.
When installing a coupling to a servomotor shaft end, do not apply an impact by

hammering, etc. The detector could be damaged.
Do not apply a load exceeding the tolerable load onto the servomotor shaft. The shaft
could break.
Store the motor in the package box.
When inserting the shaft into the built-in IPM motor, do not heat the rotor higher than
130°C. The magnet could be demagnetized, and the specifications characteristics will not
be ensured.
If the unit has been stored for a long time, always check the operation before starting
actual operation. Please contact the Service Center or Service Station.
v
CAUTION
(2) Wiring
Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the
servomotor.
Do not install a condensing capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter on the output side
of the servo drive unit.
Correctly connect the output side (terminals U, V, W). Failure to do so could lead to abnormal
operation of the servomotor.
Do not directly connect a commercial

power supply to the servomotor. Failure Servodrive unit Servodrive unit
to observe this could result in a fault. COM COM

(24VDC) (24VDC)
When using an inductive load such as a

relay, always connect a diode as a Control output Control output
RA RA
noise measure parallel to the load. signal signal
When using a capacitance load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor as a
noise measure serial to the load.
Do not reverse the direction of a diode which connect to a DC relay for the control output
signals to suppress a surge. Connecting it backwards could cause the drive unit to
malfunction so that signals are not output, and emergency stop and other safety circuits are
inoperable.
Do not connect/disconnect the cables connected between the units while the power is ON.
Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screw or fixing mechanism. An insecure fixing
could cause the cable to fall off while the power is ON.
When using a shielded cable instructed in the connection manual, always ground the cable
with a cable clamp, etc.
Always separate the signals wires from the drive wire and power line.
Use wires and cables that have a wire diameter, heat resistance and flexibility that conforms
to the system.
vi
CAUTION
(3) Trial operation and adjustment
Check and adjust each program and parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so
could lead to unforeseen operation of the machine.
Do not make remarkable adjustments and changes as the operation could become unstable.
(4) Usage methods
Install an external emergency stop circuit so that the operation can be stopped and power
shut off immediately.
Turn the power OFF immediately if smoke, abnormal noise or odors are generated from the
servo drive unit or servomotor.
Unqualified persons must not disassemble or repair the unit.
Never make modifications.
Reduce magnetic damage by installing a noise filter. The electronic devices used near the
servo drive unit could be affected by magnetic noise.
Use the servo drive unit, servomotor and regenerative resistor with the designated
combination. Failure to do so could lead to fires or trouble.
The brake (magnetic brake) assembled into the servomotor are for holding, and must not be
used for normal braking.
There may be cases when holding is not possible due to the magnetic brake's life or the
machine construction (when ball screw and servomotor are coupled via a timing belt, etc.).
Install a stop device to ensure safety on the machine side.
After changing the programs/parameters or after maintenance and inspection, always test the
operation before starting actual operation.
Do not enter the movable range of the machine during automatic operation. Never place body
parts near or touch the spindle during rotation.
Follow the power supply specification conditions given in the separate specifications manual
for the power (input voltage, input frequency, tolerable sudden power failure time, etc.).
Set all bits to "0" if they are indicated as not used or empty in the explanation on the bits.
Do not use the dynamic brakes except during the emergency stop. Continuous use of the
dynamic brakes could result in brake damage.
If a breaker is shared by several power supply units, the breaker may not activate when a
short-circuit fault occurs in a small capacity unit. This is dangerous, so never share the
breakers.
vii
CAUTION
(5) Troubleshooting
If a hazardous situation is predicted during power failure or product trouble, use a servomotor
with magnetic brakes or install an external brake mechanism.
Use a double circuit configuration Shut off with the servomotor Shut off with NC brake
that allows the operation circuit for brake control output. control PLC output.
the magnetic brakes to be operated Servomotor

MBR EMG
even by the external emergency
stop signal. Magnetic 24VDC
brake
Always turn the input power OFF when an alarm occurs.
Never go near the machine after restoring the power after a power failure, as the machine
could start suddenly. (Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the
machine starts suddenly.)
(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

Always carry out maintenance and inspection after backing up the servo drive unit's programs
or parameters.
The capacity of the electrolytic capacitor will drop over time. To prevent secondary disasters
due to failures, replacing this part every five years when used under a normal environment is
recommended. Contact the Service Center or Service Station for replacement.
Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspections.
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters
with an input/output unit, and then replace the battery.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
(7) Disposal
Dispose of this unit as general industrial waste. Note that MDS Series unit with a heat
dissipating fin protruding from the back of the unit contains substitute Freon. Do not dispose
of this type of unit as general industrial waste. Always return to the Service Center or Service
Station.
Do not disassemble the servo drive unit or servomotor parts.
Dispose of the battery according to local laws.
(8) General precautions

The drawings given in this Specifications and Maintenance Instruction Manual show the covers and
safety partitions, etc., removed to provide a clearer explanation. Always return the covers or partitions
to their respective places before starting operation, and always follow the instructions given in this
manual.
viii
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2
1-1-1 System configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-1-2 Unit outline type ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Explanation of type ........................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2-1 Servomotor type......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2-2 Servo drive unit type .................................................................................................................. 1-8
1-2-3 Spindle motor type ................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-2-4 Spindle drive unit type ............................................................................................................. 1-12
1-2-5 Power supply unit type............................................................................................................. 1-13
1-2-6 AC reactor type ........................................................................................................................ 1-14
2. Specifications
2-1 Servomotor ....................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-1 Specifications list ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Torque characteristics ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2-2 Spindle motor.................................................................................................................................. 2-10
2-2-1 Specifications........................................................................................................................... 2-10
2-2-2 Output characteristics .............................................................................................................. 2-15
2-3 Drive unit......................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2-3-1 Servo drive unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-20
2-3-2 Spindle drive unit ..................................................................................................................... 2-22
2-3-3 Power supply unit..................................................................................................................... 2-23
2-3-4 AC reactor................................................................................................................................ 2-24
2-3-5 D/A output specifications for servo drive unit .......................................................................... 2-25
2-3-6 D/A output specifications for spindle drive unit........................................................................ 2-26
2-3-7 Explanation of each part .......................................................................................................... 2-27
2-4 Restrictions on servo control .......................................................................................................... 2-30
2-4-1 Restrictions of electronic gear setting value ............................................................................ 2-30
2-4-2 Restrictions on absolute position control ................................................................................. 2-32
3. Characteristics
3-1 Servomotor ....................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-1 Environmental conditions........................................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-2 Quakeproof level........................................................................................................................ 3-2
3-1-3 Shaft characteristics................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-4 Oil/water standards .................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-1-5 Magnetic brake .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
3-1-6 Dynamic brake characteristics................................................................................................... 3-8
3-2 Spindle motor.................................................................................................................................. 3-10
3-2-1 Environmental conditions......................................................................................................... 3-10
3-2-2 Shaft characteristics................................................................................................................. 3-10
3-3 Drive unit characteristics................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-3-1 Environmental conditions......................................................................................................... 3-11
3-3-2 Heating value ........................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-3-3 Overload protection characteristics ......................................................................................... 3-13
4. Dedicated Options
4-1 Servo options.................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1 Battery and terminator option (mandatory selection)................................................................. 4-3
4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) (mandatory selection for large capacity)............................ 4-5
4-1-3 Ball screw end detector ............................................................................................................. 4-7
4-1-4 Machine end detector ................................................................................................................ 4-8
4-1-5 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR)..................................................................................... 4-10
4-1-6 Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD) ............................................................................................... 4-12
4-2 Spindle option ................................................................................................................................. 4-14
4-2-1 Magnetic sensor....................................................................................................................... 4-16
4-2-2 Spindle end detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8) .......................................... 4-18
4-2-3 C-axis detector (OSE90K) ....................................................................................................... 4-20
4-2-4 C-axis detector (MBE90K) ....................................................................................................... 4-22
4-2-5 C-axis detector (MHE90K)....................................................................................................... 4-23
4-2-6 Spindle end PLG (MXE128/180/256/512) ............................................................................... 4-24
4-2-7 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX)................................................................................. 4-28
4-3 Cables and connectors ................................................................................................................... 4-30
4-3-1 Cable connection diagram ....................................................................................................... 4-30
4-3-2 List of cables and connectors .................................................................................................. 4-31
5. Peripheral Devices
5-1 Selecting the wire size ...................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2 Selection the AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker ................................................................ 5-5
5-2-1 Standard selection ..................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-2-2 Selection when a contactor is shared ........................................................................................ 5-6
5-3 Circuit protector ................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5-4 Circuit protector ................................................................................................................................ 5-8
5-5 Noise filter......................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-6 Surge absorber ............................................................................................................................... 5-10
5-7 Speedometer and load meter ......................................................................................................... 5-11
5-8 Cable for peripheral control ............................................................................................................ 5-12
5-8-1 Cable for external emergency stop.......................................................................................... 5-12
5-8-2 Cable for servomotor magnetic brake...................................................................................... 5-13
Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-1 Servomotor outline dimension drawings ........................................................................A1-2
Appendix 1-1-1 HC Series.................................................................................................................A1-2
Appendix 1-1-2 HA Series.................................................................................................................A1-8
Appendix 1-2 Outline dimension drawings of spindle motor...............................................................A1-12
Appendix 1-2-1 SJ Series................................................................................................................A1-12
Appendix 1-2-2 SJ-V Series............................................................................................................A1-15
Appendix 1-2-3 SJ-VS Series .........................................................................................................A1-25
Appendix 1-2-4 SJ-PMF Series (IPM motor)...................................................................................A1-27
Appendix 1-3 Unit outline dimension drawings...................................................................................A1-28
Appendix 1-3-1 Servo/spindle drive unit .........................................................................................A1-28
Appendix 1-3-2 Power supply unit ..................................................................................................A1-37
Appendix 1-3-3 AC rector................................................................................................................A1-41
Appendix 2. Table and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable ...........................................................................................................A2-2
Appendix 2-1-1 Cable wire and assembly.........................................................................................A2-2
Appendix 2-1-2 Flexible conduits ......................................................................................................A2-4
Appendix 2-2 Cable connection diagram..............................................................................................A2-6
Appendix 2-3 Connector outline dimension drawings ........................................................................A2-12
Appendix 3. Selection
Appendix 3-1 Selecting the servomotor series .....................................................................................A3-2
Appendix 3-1-1 Motor series characteristics .....................................................................................A3-2
Appendix 3-1-2 Servomotor precision...............................................................................................A3-3
Appendix 3-2 Selection of servomotor capacity....................................................................................A3-4
Appendix 3-2-1 Load inertia ratio ......................................................................................................A3-4
Appendix 3-2-2 Short time characteristics ........................................................................................A3-4
Appendix 3-2-3 Continuous characteristics.......................................................................................A3-5
Appendix 3-3 Example of servo selection.............................................................................................A3-7
Appendix 3-3-1 Motor selection calculation ......................................................................................A3-7
Appendix 3-3-2 Servo selection results...........................................................................................A3-10
Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque .......................................................................A3-11
Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation .................................................................A3-12
Appendix 3-4 Selecting the power supply...........................................................................................A3-13
Appendix 3-4-1 Selecting according to the continuous rated capacity ...........................................A3-13
Appendix 3-4-2 Selection with maximum momentary capacity.......................................................A3-14
Appendix 3-4-3 Selection example .................................................................................................A3-15
Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
Appendix 4-1 Explanation of large capacity spindle unit specifications ...............................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-1 Outline......................................................................................................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-2 List of units...............................................................................................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-3 Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB ................................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-4 Outline dimension drawings.....................................................................................A4-3
Appendix 4-1-5 Panel cut dimension drawing...................................................................................A4-8
Appendix 4-1-6 Heating value...........................................................................................................A4-9
Appendix 4-1-7 Selecting the power capacity ...................................................................................A4-9
Appendix 4-1-8 Selecting the wire size .............................................................................................A4-9
Appendix 4-1-9 Drive unit connection screw size ...........................................................................A4-10
Appendix 4-1-10 Connecting each unit ...........................................................................................A4-10
Appendix 4-1-11 Restrictions ..........................................................................................................A4-12
Appendix 4-1-12 Parameters ..........................................................................................................A4-14
Appendix 4-1-13 Precautions..........................................................................................................A4-14
Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

Appendix 5-1 Transportation restrictions for lithium batteries ................................................................A5-2
Appendix 5-1-1 Target products........................................................................................................A5-2
Appendix 5-1-2 Handling by user......................................................................................................A5-3
Appendix 5-1-3 Regulations enforcement timing ..............................................................................A5-4
Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

Appendix 6-1 Compliance to EC Directives..........................................................................................A6-2
Appendix 6-1-1 European EC Directives ..........................................................................................A6-2
Appendix 6-2-2 Cautions for EC Directive compliance........................................................................A6-2
Appendix 7. EMS Instruction Guidelines

Appendix 7-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................A7-2
Appendix 7-2 EMC instructions ............................................................................................................A7-2
Appendix 7-3 EMC measures ...............................................................................................................A7-3
Appendix 7-4 Measures for panel structure..........................................................................................A7-3
Appendix 7-4-1 Measures for control panel unit ...............................................................................A7-3
Appendix 7-4-2 Measures for door....................................................................................................A7-4
Appendix 7-4-3 Measures for operation board panel........................................................................A7-4
Appendix 7-4-4 Shielding of the power supply input section ............................................................A7-4
Appendix 7-5 Measures for various cables...........................................................................................A7-5
Appendix 7-5-1 Measures for wiring in panel....................................................................................A7-5
Appendix 7-5-2 Measures for shield treatment .................................................................................A7-5
Appendix 7-5-3 Servomotor power cable..........................................................................................A7-6
Appendix 7-5-4 Servomotor feedback cable .....................................................................................A7-6
Appendix 7-5-5 Spindle motor power cable ......................................................................................A7-7
Appendix 7-5-6 Spindle motor feedback cable .................................................................................A7-7
Appendix 7-6 EMC countermeasure parts............................................................................................A7-8
Appendix 7-6-1 Shield clamp fitting...................................................................................................A7-8
Appendix 7-6-2 Ferrite core ..............................................................................................................A7-9
Appendix 7-6-3 Power line filter ......................................................................................................A7-10
Appendix 7-6-4 Surge protector ......................................................................................................A7-15
Appendix 8. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard..................................................... A8-2
Appendix 9. Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC Certification) System
Appendix 9-1 Outline of China Compulsory Product Certification System...........................................A9-2
Appendix 9-2 First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification .....................A9-2
Appendix 9-3 Precautions for Shipping Products .................................................................................A9-3
Appendix 9-4 Application for Exemption...............................................................................................A9-4
Appendix 9-5 Mitsubishi NC Product Subject to/Not Subject to CCC Certification ..............................A9-5
1. Introduction
1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration .......................................................................................... 1-2

1-1-1 System configuration................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-1-2 Unit outline type........................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Explanation of type............................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-2-1 Servomotor type .......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2-2 Servo drive unit type.................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-2-3 Spindle motor type .................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-2-4 Spindle drive unit type ............................................................................................................... 1-12
1-2-5 Power supply unit type .............................................................................................................. 1-13
1-2-6 AC reactor type ......................................................................................................................... 1-14
1-1
1. Introduction
1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration
1-1-1 System configuration
1-axis servo drive 2-axis servo drive Spindle drive unit Power supply unit Battery unit
unit unit (MDS-C1-SP) (MDS-C1-CV) (MDS-A-BT)
(MDS-C1-V1) (MDS-C1-V2)
Terminator
From NC
Connect a
terminator when the
battery unit is not
L+ used.
L–
To 2nd and 3rd

axis servo
Contactor
(Note)
Prepared by
user
AC reactor
(B-AL)
Servomotor Spindle motor

NFB
(Note)
Prepared by
user
Linear scale
(for full closed control)
(Note) Prepared by user
Magnesensor or spindle detector

3-phase 200VAC power supply
1-2
1. Introduction
1-1-2 Unit outline type
Unit outline
A0 A1 A2
type
Fin Fin
D:200 D:260 D:220
200 200
Outline H:380
H:380 H:380
dimensions
[mm]
W:60
W:60 W:60
Wiring allowance at front: 50mm Wiring allowance at front: 50mm Wiring allowance at front: 50mm
A0 type does not have fins Required ventilation space at back: Heat radiation allowance at back:
15mm 15mm
Heat dissipa- Heat radiated outside panel Heat radiated outside panel
In-panel heat radiation
tion method (forced wind cooling) (natural air cooling)
Unit outline
B1 C1 D1/D2
type
Fin Fin Fin

D:260
D:260 D:260
200 200 /263 200
Outline H:380 H:380 H:380

dimensions
[mm]
W:90 W:120 W:150

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm Wiring allowance at front: 50mm Wiring allowance at front: 50mm
Required ventilation space at back: Required ventilation space at back: Required ventilation space at back:
15mm 15mm 15mm (D2: 12mm)
Heat dissipa- Heat radiated outside panel Heat radiated outside panel Heat radiated outside panel
tion method (forced wind cooling) (forced wind cooling) (forced wind cooling)
(Note) Refer to "Appendix 1 Outline dimension drawings" for detailed outline drawings.
(For customers switching from MDS-A/B Series)

The MDS-C1 Series incorporates a highly efficient heat dissipating structure, so the depth of the fin
section is smaller than the MDS-A/B Series. Units with an "S" at the end of the type have a smaller unit
width than the MDS-A/B Series.
When designing the control panel with these unit outline dimensions, it may not be possible to mount the
conventional drive unit.
1-3
1. Introduction
1-2 Explanation of type
1-2-1 Servomotor type
Motor series Rated output capacity Type

HC52, HC102, HC152, HC202, HC352, HC452,
0.5kW to 9.0kW
HC702, HC902
HC Series (Note 1)
HC53, HC103, HC153, HC203, HC353, HC453,
0.5kW to 7.0kW
HC703
HC R Series (Note 1) 1.0kW to 5.0kW HC103R, HC153R, HC203R, HC353R, HC503R
HA N Series (Note 2, 3) 0.05kW to 0.45kW HA053N, HA13N, HA23N, HA33N
HA-LF Series (Note 1) 11kW to 15kW HA-LF11K2-S8, HA-LF15K2-S8
(Note 1) The standard type complied with EN Standards and UL Standards.

(Note 2) The standard type complied with EN Standards.
(Note 3) Rated output capacity 0.5kW to 9kW motors are available with the HAN Series.
1-4
1. Introduction
(1) HC, HCR Series
MITSUBISHI
AC SERVO MOTOR
Motor type HC102S ROTARY ENCODER OSA104S2 Detector type
SER. X X X X X X X X X X X DATE 9809
INPUT 3AC 123V 6.0A
Rated output OUTPUT 1kW IEC34-1 1994 A1 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP. A Serial No.
MADE IN JAPAN
Rated rotation speed SPEED 2000r/min
Serial No. SER.No.XXXXXXXXX DATE 98-9
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MADE IN JAPAN Detector rating nameplate
Motor rating nameplate
HC (1) (2) (3) (4) - (5)
(5) Detector
Sym- Detection
Resolution Detector type
bol method
E42 100,000p/rev OSE104S2
Incremental
E51 1,000,000p/rev OSE105S2
A42 100,000p/rev OSA104S2
Absolute position
A51 1,000,000p/rev OSA105S2
(4) Protective structure

Sym- Protective
bol structure
None IP65 (Note) HC R has only IP65 compliance.
W IP67
(3) Shaft end structure

Sym- Shaft end
bol structure
S Straight (Note) Only the straight type is available for the HC
T Taper 2kW and higher capacities and HC R 3.5kW
and higher capacities.
(2) Magnetic brakes
Sym-
Magnetic brakes
bol
None None
With magnetic
B
brakes
(1) Rated output and rated rotation speed

HC Series HCR Series
Rating 2000r/min Rating 3000r/min Rating 3000r/min
Sym- Sym- Sym-
Rated output Rated output Rated output
bol bol bol
52 0.5kW 53 0.5kW 103R 1.0kW
102 1.0kW 103 1.0kW 153R 1.5kW
152 1.5kW 153 1.5kW 203R 2.0kW
202 2.0kW 203 2.0kW 353R 3.5kW
352 3.5kW 353 3.5kW 503R 5.0kW
452 4.5kW 453 4.5kW
702 7.0kW 703 7.0kW
902 9.0kW
1-5
1. Introduction
(2) HAN Series
SERVO MOTOR ASSY

MITSUBISHI
Motor type TYPE HA23NBS-A42
Rated output MOTOR 0.3kW 3000r/min
Detector ENCODER ABS 100000p/rev
Serial No. SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 9706

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN
Rating nameplate
HA (1) N (2) (3) (4) - (5)
(5) Detector
Sym- Detection
bol method
E42 100,000p/rev OSE104S
Incremental
E51 1,000,000p/rev OSE105S
A42 100,000p/rev OSA104S
Absolute position
A51 1,000,000p/rev OSA105S

Sym- Protective
bol structure
None IP54
D5 IP65
(3) Shaft end structure

Sym- Shaft end (Note) Only the straight type is available for
bol structure HA053N and 13N.
S Straight
T Taper
(2) Magnetic brakes

Sym-
Magnetic brakes
bol
None None
With magnetic
B
brakes

Rating 3000r/min
Sym-
Rated output
bol
053 0.05kW
13 0.1kW
23 0.3kW
33 0.45kW
1-6
1. Introduction
(3) HA-LF Series
SERVO MOTOR ASSY

MITSUBISHI
Motor type TYPE HA-LF11K2-A42
Rated output MOTOR 11kW 2000r/min
Detector ENCODER ABS 100000p/rev
SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX
Serial No. DATE 9706
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN
Rating nameplate
HA-LF (1) (2) -S8- (3)
(3) Detector
Detection
method
E42 100,000p/rev OSE104S1
Incremental
E51 1,000,000p/rev OSE105S1
A42 100,000p/rev OSA104S1
Absolute position
A51 1,000,000p/rev OSA105S1
(2) Magnetic brakes

Sym-
Magnetic brakes
bol
None None
With magnetic
B brakes

Rating 2000r/min
Sym-
Rated output
bol
11K2 11kW
15K2 15kW
(Note 1) The protection structure is equivalent to IP44.

(Note 2) Only the straight type shaft end is available.
1-7
1. Introduction
1-2-2 Servo drive unit type
MITSUBISHI SERVO DRIVE UNIT

Motor type TYPE MDS-C1-V1-05
POWER 0.5kW
Rated input INPUT 4A DC270-311V
0.2A 1PH 200-230V 50/60Hz
Rated output OUTPUT 3.4A 3PH 155V 0-240Hz
3040
MANUAL# BNP-C3000
Current state S/W BNDXXXXXXXXX H/W VER. *
SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 00/01
Serial No. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN
* X X X X X X X X X X X *
Rating nameplate
MDS-C1- (1)
1-axis servo drive unit Compatible motor

(1) Motor Capa- HA N HC HC R HA-LF
Outline
type city
(width) 053 13 23 33 52 53 102 103 152 153 202 203 352 353 452 453 702 703 902 103 153 203 353 503 11K2 15K2
MDS-C1- (kW)
V1-01 0.1 ●●
V1-03 0.3 A0 ●●
V1-05 0.5 (60mm) ●●
V1-10 1.0 ●● ●●
V1-20 2.0
A1
●●● ●
V1-35 3.5
(60mm)
●● ●
V1-45S 4.5 ▲ ▲
V1-45 4.5 B1 ●● ●
V1-70S 7.0 (90mm) ▲ ▲
V1-70 7.0 C1 ●●
V1-90 9.0 (120mm) ●●
V1-110 11.0 D2 ●
V1-150 15.0 (150mm) ●
● or ▲ indicates the compatible motor for each servo drive unit.
Note continuous operation of ▲ (V1-45S, V1-70S) is limited.
CAUTION The dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) is required for the MDS-C1-V1-110/150.
1-8
1. Introduction
2-axis servo drive unit Compatible motor

(1) Motor Capa- HA N HC HC R
Outline
type city Axis
(width) 053 13 23 33 52 53 102 103 152 153 202 203 352 353 452 453 702 703 902 103 153 203 353 503
MDS-C1- (kW)
V2-0101 0.1+0.1 LM ●●
0.3+0.1
L ●●
V2-0301
M ●●
V2-0303 0.3+0.3 LM ●●
0.5+0.1
L ●●
V2-0501
A0 M ●●
0.5+0.3
(60mm) L ●●
V2-0503
M ●●
V2-0505 0.5+0.5 LM ●●
1.0+0.5
L ●●
V2-1005
M ●●
V2-1010 1.0+1.0 LM ●● ● ●
2.0+1.0
L ●● ● ●
V2-2010
M ●● ●●
V2-2020 2.0+2.0
A1
LM ●● ● ●
V2-3510S 3.5+1.0 (60mm)
L ●● ●
M ●● ●●
V2-3520S 3.5+2.0
L ●● ●
M ●● ● ●
3.5+1.0
L ●● ●
V2-3510
M ●● ●●
3.5+2.0
L ●● ●
V2-3520
M ●● ● ●
V2-3535 3.5+3.5
B1
LM ●● ●
4.5+2.0 (90mm)
L ●● ●
V2-4520
M ●● ● ●
4.5+3.5
L ●● ●
V2-4535
M ●● ●
V2-4545S 4.5+4.5 LM ▲ ▲
V2-7070S 7.0+7.0 LM ▲ ▲
V2-4545 4.5+4.5 LM ●● ●
7.0+3.5 C1
L ●●
V2-7035
(120mm)
M ● ●
7.0+4.5
L ●●
V2-7045
M ●●
V2-7070 7.0+7.0 D2 LM ●●
V2-9090S 9.0+9.0 (150mm) LM ▲ ●
● or ▲ indicates the compatible motor for each servo drive unit.
Note continuous operation of ▲ (V2-4545S, V2-7070S, V2-9090S) is limited.
1. The MDS-C1-V2-3510/3520 shape is compatible with the MDS-B Series.

When newly incorporating the MDS-C1 Series, use the
CAUTION MDS-C1-V2-3510S/3520S.
2. Limits apply to continuous operation of the MDS-C1-V2-4545S/9090S.
1-9
1. Introduction
1-2-3 Spindle motor type

MITSUBISHI AC SPINDLE MOTOR
TYPE SJ-V5. 5-01
SI CONT 4 POLE 3 PHASES
A(~)
kW r/min max
WIND CONNECT U
3.7 1500-6000 25 P OW ER FAC TOR 82 %
2.8 8000 17 MOTOR INPUT(~)
S2 30 min S3 50 % 137 - 162 V
A(~)
kW r/min max AMP INPUT(~)
5.5 1500-6000 33 200-230V 50/60Hz
4.1 8000 23 INSULATION CLASS F

AMB TEMP. 0-40ºC
SERIAL
DATE
FRAME D90F WEIGHT 49 kg IP 44
IEC 34-1 1994 SPEC No.RSV00023*
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
A19103-01 995291-01
Rating nameplate
(1) Standard spindle motor series
SJ- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(5) Z-phase detection

Sym- Z-phase (Note) Presence of the Z-phase applies only to the SJ
bol presences and SJ-V Series.
None No Z-phase
M Z-phase present
(4) Special specifications

Sym- Special (Note) A number indicating the constant output range is
bol specifications indicated after the symbol for the wide range
None None output.
Z High-speed
Wide-range
W constant output
(3) Base speed

Sym- Base speed (Note) The SJ-V Series is indicated with a specification
bol code (–01 to –99).
A 1500r/min
B 1150r/min
L 5000r/min
X Special
(2) Short time rated output

Sym- Short time Sym- Short time (Note) The 37kW and larger
bol rated output bol rated output capacities are handled
2.2 2.2kW 22 22kW with the MDS-B-SP
Series.
3.7 3.7kW 26 26kW Refer to Appendix 5
5.5 5.5kW 30 30kW for details.
7.5 7.5kW 37 37kW
11 11kW 45 45kW
15 15kW 55 55kW
18.5 18.5kW
(1) Motor series

Sym- Motor series
bol
None Large capacity
Compact medium to
V large capacity
VS Hollow shaft
(Note) Refer to the "MELDAS AC Spindle Built-in Series Standard Specifications" (BFN-14118-04) for
details on the built-in spindle motor.
1 - 10
1. Introduction
(2) IPM spindle motor series
SJ-PMF (1) (2) - (3)
(3) Specification code (00)
(2) Base speed

Sym-
Base speed
bol
30 3000r/min
(1) 30-minute rated torque

Sym- 30-minute rated
bol torque
018 17.5N·m
035 35.0N·m
(Note) The built-in IPM spindle motor is available by special order.
1 - 11
1. Introduction
1-2-4 Spindle drive unit type
MITSUBISHI SERVO DRIVE UNIT

Motor type TYPE MDS-C1-SP-55
POWER 5.5kW
Rated input INPUT 20A DC270-311V
0.2A 1PH 200/200-230V 50/60Hz
Rated output OUTPUT 18A 3PH 155V 0-240Hz
3040
MANUAL# BNP-C3000
Current state S/W BNDXXXXXXXXX H/W VER. *
* X X X X X X X X X X X *
Rating nameplate
MDS-C1- (1) - (2)
(2) Capacity
Capa- (Note) The 37kW and larger capacities are
Outline type available with the MDS-B-SP Series.
Symbol city
(unit width) Refer to Appendix 5 for details.
(kW)
04 0.4
A0
075 0.75
(60mm wide)
15 1.5
22 2.2 A1
37 3.7 (60mm wide)
55 5.5
75 7.5 B1
110 11 (90mm wide)
150S 15
150 15 C1
185 18.5 (120mm wide)
D1
220 22
(150mm wide)
260 26 D2
300 30 (150mm wide)
(1) Spindle drive unit series

Compatible motor
Symbol Details
rotation speed
SP Less than 10,000r/min IM standard specifications
SPH 10,000r/min or more
SPX Less than 10,000r/min IM detector conversion unit compatible
specifications
SPHX 10,000r/min or more (MDS-B-PJEX unit can be connected)
IPM motor compatible specifications
SPM All ranges (Use to drive the IPM spindle motor)
1 - 12
1. Introduction
1-2-5 Power supply unit type
MITSUBISHI POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Motor type TYPE MDS-C1-CV-150
POWER 15kW
Rated input INPUT 49A 3PH 200/200-230V 50/60Hz
0.2A 1PH 200/200-230V 50/60Hz
Rated output OUTPUT 58A DC270-311V
3040
DIN VDE0160 MANUAL# BNP-C3000
Current state S/W BND538W000A1 H/W VER. D
* ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ *
Rating nameplate
MDS-C1- (1)
Power supply unit Compatible

Compatible NFB
(1) Motor Capa- Compatible AC contactor
(Mitsubishi)
type city Outline type reactor (Mitsubishi)
(Note 1)
(kW) (unit width) (Note 1)
MDS-C1-
CV-37 3.7
A2
CV-55 5.5 B-AL-7.5K S-N25 200VAC NF50CS3P-40A05
(60mm wide)
CV-75 7.5
B1
CV-110 11 B-AL-11K S-N35 200VAC NF50CS3P-50A05
(90mm wide)
CV-150 15 C1
B-AL-18.5K S-N50 200VAC NF100CS3P-100A05
CV-185 18.5 (120mm wide)
CV-220 22
CV-260 26 D1 B-AL-30K S-N80 200VAC NF225CS3P-150A05
CV-300 30 (150mm wide)
CV-370 37 B-AL-37K S-N150 200VAC NF225CS3P-175A05
(Note 1) This is an optional part, and must be prepared by the user.

(Note 2) The 45kW and larger capacities are available with the MDS-B-CVE Series.
Refer to Appendix 4 for details.
1 - 13
1. Introduction
1-2-6 AC reactor type
Type B-AL-7.5K
Nameplate
Top surface of AC reactor
B-AL- (1)
AC reactor
Motor Capa- Compatible
type city power supply unit
B-AL- (kW)
MDS-C1-CV-37
7.5K 7.5 MDS-C1-CV-55
MDS-C1-CV-75
11K 11 MDS-C1-CV-110
MDS-C1-CV-150
18.5K 18.5
MDS-C1-CV-185
MDS-C1-CV-220
30K 30 MDS-C1-CV-260
MDS-C1-CV-300
37K 37 MDS-C1-CV-370
1 - 14
2. Specifications
2-1 Servomotor......................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-1 Specifications list......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Torque characteristics ................................................................................................................. 2-7
2-2 Spindle motor ................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2-2-1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
2-2-2 Output characteristics................................................................................................................ 2-15
2-3 Drive unit .......................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2-3-1 Servo drive unit.......................................................................................................................... 2-20
2-3-2 Spindle drive unit....................................................................................................................... 2-22
2-3-3 Power supply unit ...................................................................................................................... 2-23
2-3-4 AC reactor ................................................................................................................................. 2-24
2-3-5 D/A output specifications for servo drive unit ............................................................................ 2-25
2-3-6 D/A output specifications for spindle drive unit ......................................................................... 2-26
2-3-7 Explanation of each part............................................................................................................ 2-27
2-4 Restrictions on servo control............................................................................................................ 2-30
2-4-1 Restrictions of electronic gear setting value ............................................................................. 2-30
2-4-2 Restrictions on absolute position control .................................................................................. 2-32
2-1
2. Specifications
2-1 Servomotor
2-1-1 Specifications list
HC Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)

Servomotor type INC specifications: HC-E51/-E42, ABS specifications: HC-A51/-A42
HC52 HC102 HC152 HC202 HC352 HC452 HC702 HC902
Compatible servo drive unit type
05 10 20 35 45 70 90
MDS-C1-V1/V2-
Rated output [kW] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.0
Rated current [A] 3.2 6.0 9.0 10.7 16.9 23.3 32.8 40.8
Continuous
Rated torque [N·m] 2.39 4.78 7.16 9.55 16.7 21.5 33.4 43.0
characteristics
Stall current [A] 3.94 7.4 11.1 15.4 22.9 39.5 (31.5) 46.2 (41.0) 55.6 (55.6)
Stall torque [N·m] 2.94 5.88 8.82 13.7 22.5 37.2 (29.0) 49.0 (44.0) 58.8 (58.8)
Rated rotation speed [r/min] 2000
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 2000
Maximum current [A] 17 28 47 47 64 85 113 141
Maximum torque [N·m] 11.8 21.6 35.3 41.7 59.8 87.5 120 153
Power rate at continuous
[kW/s] 8.7 16.7 25.6 21.5 34.0 38.2 69.7 82.5
rated torque
Motor inertia [kg·cm2] 6.6 13.7 20.0 42.5 82 121 160 204
Motor inertia with brake [kg·cm2] 8.6 15.7 22.0 51.1 92 131 170 214
High-speed, high-accuracy machine : 2 times or less of motor inertia
Recommended motor shaft conversion load
General machine tool : 3 times or less of motor inertia
inertia rate
General machine : 5 times or less of motor inertia
Resolution per motor rotation
Motor end detector
E51/A51: 1,000,000 pulse/rev, E42/A42: 100,000 pulse/rev
Structure Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP65, IP67)
Ambient temperature Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)
Operation: 80%RH or less (non condensing),
Ambient humidity
Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)
Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust
Environment
Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,
Altitude
Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level
X:9.8m/s2 (1G) X:19.6m/s2 (2G) X:11.7m/s2 (1.2G) X:19.6m/s2
Vibration 2
Y:24.5m/s (2.5G) Y:49m/s2 (5G) Y:24.5m/s2 (2.5G) Y:49m/s2
Weight Without/with brake [kg] 5.0/7.5 7.0/9.0 9.0/11 12/18 19/25 25/30 32/38 45/51
Armature insulation class Class F
(Note 1) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when
combined with the drive unit.
(Note 2) Values when combined with the S-type drive unit are shown in parentheses.
2-2
2. Specifications

Servomotor type INC specifications: HC-E51/-E42, ABS specifications: HC-A51/-A42
HC53 HC103 HC153 HC203 HC353 HC453 HC703
05 10 20 35 45 70 90
MDS-C1-V1/V2-
Rated output [kW] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0
Rated current [A] 3.2 5.3 8.6 10.4 16.5 22.1 30.5
Rated torque [N·m] 1.59 3.18 4.77 6.37 11.1 14.3 22.3
Continuous
33.3 55.6 66.7
characteristics Stall current [A] 5.8 9.8 15.9 22.4
(31.5) (41.0) (55.6)
22.5 37.2 49.0
Stall torque [N·m] 2.94 5.88 8.82 13.7
(21.2) (30.4) (40.8)
Maximum current [A] 17 28 47 64 85 113 141
Maximum torque [N·m] 8.82 16.7 28.4 40.2 55.9 79.8 105
[kW/s] 3.8 7.4 11.4 9.5 15.0 16.9 29.3
rated torque
Motor inertia [kg·cm2] 6.6 13.7 20.0 42.5 82 121 160
Motor inertia with brake [kg·cm2] 8.6 15.7 22.0 52.5 92 131 170
inertia rate
Motor end detector
Ambient humidity
Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or
Atmosphere
Environment dust
Altitude
X:9.8m/s2 (1G) X:19.6m/s2 (2G) X:11.7m/s2 (1.2G)
Vibration
Y:24.5m/s2 (2.5G) Y:49m/s2 (5G) Y:24.5m/s2 (2.5G)
Weight Without/with brake [kg] 5.0/7.5 7.0/9.0 9.0/11 12/18 19/25 25/30 32/38
(Note 1) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when
(Note 2) Values when combined with the S-type drive unit are shown in parentheses.
2-3
2. Specifications
HCR Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

HCR Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)
INC specifications: HCR-E51/-E42/-E33,
Servomotor type
ABS specifications: HCR-A51/-A42/-A33
HC103R HC153R HC203R HC353R HC503R
10 20 35 45
MDS-C1-V1/V2-
Rated output [kW] 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
Rated current [A] 6.1 8.8 14.0 22.5 28.0
Continuous
Rated torque [N·m] 3.18 4.77 6.37 11.1 15.9
characteristics
Stall current [A] 6.1 8.8 14.0 22.5 28.0
Stall torque [N·m] 3.18 4.77 6.37 11.1 15.9
Maximum current [A] 18.4 23.4 37.0 56.3 70.0
Maximum torque [N·m] 7.95 11.9 15.9 27.8 39.8
[kW/s] 67.4 120 176 150 211
rated torque
Motor inertia [kg·cm2] 1.5 1.9 2.3 8.3 12.0
Motor inertia with brake [kg·cm2] 1.9 2.3 2.7 11.8 15.5
inertia rate
Motor end detector
Structure Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP65)
Ambient humidity
Environment Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust
Altitude
Vibration X:9.8m/s2 (1G) Y:24.5m/s2 (2.5G)
Weight Without/with brake [kg] 3.9/6.0 5.0/7.0 6.2/8.3 12/15 17/21
(Note) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when
2-4
2. Specifications
HAN Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

HAN Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)
Servomotor type INC Specifications: HAN-E51/-E42, ABS specifications: HAN-A51/-A42
HA053N HA13N HA23N HA33N
01 03
MDS-C1-V1/V2-
Rated output [kW] 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.45
Rated current [A] 0.95 0.95 2.9 2.2
Continuous
Rated torque [N·m] 0.16 0.32 0.95 1.43
characteristics
Stall current [A] 1.4 1.4 3.0 3.0
Stall torque [N·m] 0.25 0.49 0.98 1.96
Maximum current [A] 3.8 3.8 8.1 8.1
Maximum torque [N·m] 0.69 1.37 2.7 5.6
[kW/s] 1.4 2.8 9.3 10.4
rated torque
Motor inertia [kg·cm2] 0.188 0.365 0.98 1.96
Motor inertia with brake [kg·cm2] 0.204 0.381 1.18 2.16
inertia rate
Motor end detector
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Vibration X:19.6m/s2 (2G) Y:19.6m/s2 (2G)
Weight Without/with brake [kg] 2.1/2.5 2.5/2.9 3.5/4.5 4.5/5.5
2-5
2. Specifications
HA-LF Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)

HA-LF Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)
INC specifications: HA-LF-E51/-E42,
Servomotor type
ABS specifications: HA-LF-A51/-A42
HA-LF11K2-S8 HA-LF15K2-S8
110 150
MDS-C1-V1/V2-
Rated output [kW] 11.0 15.0
Rated current [A] 63.0 77.0
Continuous
Rated torque [N·m] 52.5 71.6
characteristics
Stall current [A] 84.7 98.6
Stall torque [N·m] 70.6 91.7
Maximum current [A] 204 260
Maximum torque [N·m] 170 240
[kW/s] 263 233
rated torque
Motor inertia [kg·cm2] 105 220
Motor inertia with brake [kg·cm2] 113 293
inertia rate
Motor end detector
Structure Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP44)
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Vibration X:11.7m/s2 (1.2G) Y:29.4m/s2 (3G)
Weight Without/with brake [kg] 55/70 95/126
2-6
2. Specifications
2-1-2 Torque characteristics

(1) HC Series
[ HC52 ] [ HC102 ] [ HC152 ]

20 40 40
15 30 30
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
10 20 20 Short time operation range
Short time operation range Short time operation range
5 10 10
Continuous operation range

Continuous operation range Continuous operation range
0 0 0
0 1000 2000 0 1000 2000 0 1000 2000
Rotation speed [r/min] Rotation speed [r/min] Rotation speed [r/min]
[ HC202 ] [ HC352 ] [ HC452 ]

50 75 100
40 60 80
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
30 45 Short time operation range 60 Short time operation range
Short time operation range

20 30 40
10 15 20
0 0 0
0 1000 2000 0 1000 2000 0 1000 2000
[ HC702 ] [ HC902 ]
150 250
120 200
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
90 Short time operation range 150
60 100 Short time operation range
30 50
0 0
0 1000 2000 0 1000 2000
Rotation speed [r/min] Rotation speed [r/min]
(Note 1) The above graphs show the data when applied the input voltage of 200VAC.
When the input voltage is 200VAC or less, the short time operation range is limited.
(Note 2) The dotted lines show the values when combined with the S-type drive unit.
2-7
2. Specifications
[ HC53 ] [ HC103 ] [ HC153 ]

10 20 40
8
15 30
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
6 Short time operation range
10 Short time operation range 20 Short time operation range
4
5 10
2
Continuous operation range Continuous operation range Continuous operation range

0 0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
[ HC203 ] [ HC353 ] [ HC453 ]

60 60 100
45 45 75
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]

30 30 50

15 15 25

0 0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
[ HC703 ] [ HC103R ] [ HC153R ]

120 20 20
90 15 15
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]

60 10 10

30 5 5

0 0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
[ HC203R ] 40
[ HC353R ] [ HC503R ]
20 60
30 45
15

Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
10 20 30
5 10 15
0 0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
(Note 1) The above graphs show the data when applied the input voltage of 200VAC.
(Note 2) The dotted lines show the values when combined with the S-type drive unit.
2-8
2. Specifications
(2) HA Series
[ HA053N ] [ HA13N ] [ HA23N ]

1.0 2.0 4
0.8
1.5 3
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
0.6
Short time operation range 1.0 Short time operation range 2 Short time operation range
0.4
0.5 1
0.2

0 0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
[ HA33N ]
10
8
Torque [N.m]
4 Short time operation range
2
0
0 1000 2000 3000
Rotation speed [r/min]
[ HA-LF11K2-S8 ] [ HA-LF15K2-S8 ]
200 400
150 Short time operation range 300

Torque [N.m]
Torque [N.m]
100 200
50 100

0 0
0 1000 2000 0 1000 2000
(Note) The above graphs show the data when applied the input voltage of 200VAC.
2-9
2. Specifications
2-2 Spindle motor
2-2-1 Specifications
Base rotation speed

1500r/min Series
Spindle motor type
SJ-V
2.2-01 3.7-01 5.5-01 7.5-01 11-01 15-01 18.5-01 22-01 26-01
Compatible spindle drive unit type
SPH-22 SPH-37 SP-55 SP-75 SP-110 SP-150 SP-185 SP-220 SP-300
MDS-C1-
Continuous rating
1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
[kW]
Output
30-minute rating
capacity
50%ED rating 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 26
[kW]
Base speed [r/min] 1500
Maximum speed [r/min] 10000 8000 6000
Frame No. A90 B90 D90 A112 B112 A160 B160 C160
Continuous rated torque [N·m] 9.5 14.0 23.5 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140
GD2 [kg·m2] 0.027 0.035 0.059 0.098 0.12 0.23 0.23 0.32 0.38
Inertia [kg·m2] 0.007 0.009 0.015 0.025 0.03 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.10
Tolerable radial load [N] 980 1470 1960 2940
Input voltage Single-phase 200V 3-phase 200V
Cooling
Maximum power
fan 42W 40W 63W
consumption
Ambient humidity
Environ- Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)
ment Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust
Altitude
Weight [kg] 25 30 49 60 70 110 135 155
Insulation Class F
(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC) to the power supply unit.
If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 200VAC, the rated output may not be attained.
(Note 2) The 50%ED rating applies for a 10-minute cycle time consisting of ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes.
When replacing the SJ-V series by the conventional SJ series, the shorter L
CAUTION dimension is applied.
2 - 10
2. Specifications
Large capacity series

Spindle motor type SJ- SJ-V
30A 37BP 45BP 55-01
SP-370 SP-450 SP-550
MDS-B-
Continuous rating
22 30 37 45
[kW]
Output
30-minute rating
capacity
50%ED rating 30 37 45 55
[kW]
Base speed [r/min] 1500 1150
Maximum speed [r/min] 4500 3450
Frame No. B160 B180 A200 A225
Continuous rated torque [N·m] 140 249 307 374
GD2 [kg·m2] 0.69 1.36 2.19 3.39
Inertia [kg·m2] 0.17 0.34 0.55 0.85
Input voltage Single-phase 200V 3-phase 200V
Cooling
Maximum power
fan 130W 60W 115W
consumption
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Weight [kg] 200 300 390 450
Insulation Class F
(Note 3) The 37kW and larger capacities are available with the MDS-B-SP Series. Refer to Appendix 4 for details.
2 - 11
2. Specifications
Wide range constant

Wide range (1:8) constant output series
output series
Spindle motor type
SJ-V SJ-
11-01 11-09 15-03 18.5-03 22-05 22XW5 22XW8
SP-110 SP-185 SP-220 SP-260 SP-300 SP-300
MDS-C1-
Continuous rating
3.7 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
Output [kW]
capacity 30-minute rating
5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
50%ED rating [kW]
500 550
Base speed [r/min] 750
(600) (600)
Frame No. B112 A160 B160 B180 A200
Continuous rated torque [N·m] 47.1 70.0 95.5 115 140 239 294
GD2 [kg·m2] 0.12 0.23 0.23 0.32 0.32 1.36 2.19
Inertia [kg·m2] 0.03 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.34 0.55
Single-
3-phase
Input voltage 3-phase 200V phase
Cooling 200V
200V
fan
Maximum power
40W 63W 180W 60W
consumption
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Weight [kg] 70 110 135 300 390
Insulation Class F
2 - 12
2. Specifications
High-speed series
Spindle motor type SJ-V
3.7-02ZM 7.5-03ZM 11-06ZM 11-08ZM 22-06ZM 30-02ZM
SPH-37 SPH-110 SPH-150 SP-185 SP-220 SP-300
MDS-C1-
Continuous rating
2.2 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 18.5
[kW]
Output
capacity 30-minute rating 3.7
50%ED rating 7.5 7.5 11 15 22
(15min. rating)
[kW]
Base speed [r/min] 3000 1500
Frame No. A90 A112 B112 A160 B160
Continuous rated torque [N·m] 7.0 35.0 35.0 47.7 70.0 118
GD2 [kg·m2] 0.027 0.098 0.098 0.12 0.23 0.32
Inertia [kg·m2] 0.007 0.025 0.025 0.03 0.06 0.08
Single-phase
Input voltage 3-phase 200V
Cooling 200V
fan Maximum power
42W 40W 63W
consumption
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Weight [kg] 25 60 70 125 155
Insulation Class F
2 - 13
2. Specifications
Hollow shaft series IPM Series

Spindle motor type SJ-VS SJ-PM
7.5-03ZM 22-06ZM 30-02ZM F01830-00 F03530-00
SPH-110 SP-220 SP-300 SPM-110 SPM-185
MDS-C1-
Continuous rating
5.5 11 18.5 3.7 7.5
[kW]
Output
30-minute rating
capacity
50%ED rating 7.5 15 22 5.5 11.0
[kW]
Base speed [r/min] 1500 1500 3000
Frame No. A112 A160 B160 71 90
Continuous rated torque [N·m] 35.0 70.0 118 11.8 23.9
GD2 [kg·m2] 0.099 0.23 0.32 0.015 0.034
Inertia [kg·m2] 0.025 0.058 0.08 0.004 0.009
Tolerable radial load [N] 0 (Note 3) 0 (Note 3) 0 (Note 3) 1470 1960
Single-
Input voltage 3-phase 200V
Cooling phase 200V
fan Maximum power
40W 40W 38W 32W
consumption
Ambient humidity
Environ-
Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or
ment Atmosphere
dust
Altitude
Weight [kg] 65 115 140 23 35
Insulation Class F
(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200 to 230VAC) to the power supply unit.
(Note 3) Do not apply a radial load.
2 - 14
2. Specifications
2-2-2 Output characteristics

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V2.2-01] [Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V3.7-01]
2.2 3.7
15-minute rating
15-minute rating
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
1.5
1.3 Continuous rating 2.2

Continuous rating
0.9
1.3
0 0
0 1500 6000 10000 0 1500 6000 10000
[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V5.5-01] [Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V7.5-01]
5.5 7.5
15-minute rating 15-minute rating
Output [kW]]
Output [kW]
4.1 5.5
3.7
Continuous rating Continuous rating
2.8 4.1
0 0
0 1500 6000 8000 0 1500 6000 8000
[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V11-01] [Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V15-01]
11 15
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
8.3 11
7.5
Continuous rating
5.6 Continuous rating 8.3
0 0
0 1500 4500 6000 0 1500 4500 6000
[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V18.5-01] [Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V22-01]
18.5 22
15 18.5
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
13.9 16.5
Continuous Continuous rating
11.3 13.9
0 0
0 1500 4500 6000 0 1500 4500 6000
2 - 15
2. Specifications
[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V26-01]
26
30-minute rating
22
Output [kW]
Continuous rating
0
0 1500 6000
[Large capacity series SJ-30A] [Large capacity series SJ-37BP]
30 37
30
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
22
Continuous rating
Continuous rating
0 0
0 1500 4500 0 1150 3450
[Large capacity series SJ-45BP] [Large capacity series SJ-V55-01]
45 55
37 45
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
Continuous rating Continuous
0 0
0 1150 3450 0 1150 3450
2 - 16
2. Specifications
[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V11-01] [Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V11-09]
5.5 7.5
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
5.5
3.7
0 0
0 750 6000 0 750 6000
[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V15-03] [Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V18.5-03]
9 11
7.5 9
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
0 0
0 750 6000 0 750 6000
[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V22-05]
15
30-minute rating
Output [kW]
11
Continuous rating
0
0 750 6000
[Wide range constant output series SJ-22XW5] [Wide range constant output series SJ-22XW8]
18.5 22
15 18.5
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
14
11.5
0 0
0 500 600 3500 4500 0 500 600 4000
2 - 17
2. Specifications
[High speed series SJ-V3.7-02ZM] [High speed series SJ-V7.5-03ZM]
3.7 7.5
3 6.3
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
5.5
2.2 4.6 Continuous rating

1.8
Continuous rating
0 0
0 3000 12000 15000 0 1500 10000 12000
[High speed series SJ-V11-06ZM] [High speed series SJ-V11-08ZM]
7.5 11
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
5.5
7.5
Continuous rating
Continuous rating
0 0
0 1500 12000 0 1500 8000
[High speed series SJ-V22-06ZM] [High speed series SJ-V30-02ZM]
15 22
18.5
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
11
Continuous rating
Continuous rating
0 0
0 1500 8000 0 1500 8000
2 - 18
2. Specifications
[Hollow shaft series SJ-V7.5-03ZM] [Hollow shaft series SJ-V22-06ZM]
7.5 15
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
5.5 11
0 0
0 1500 12000 0 1500 8000
[Hollow shaft series SJ-V30-02ZM] [IPM series SJ-PMF01830-00]
22 5.5
18.5
Output [kW]
Output [kW]
Continuous rating 3.7

Continuous rating
0 0
0 1500 8000 0 3000 8000
[IPM series SJ-PMF03530-00]
11
30-minute rating
Output [kW]
7.5
Continuous rating
0
0 3000 8000
2 - 19
2. Specifications
2-3 Drive unit
2-3-1 Servo drive unit
(1) Specifications
1) 1-axis servo drive unit
1-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V1 Series
Servo drive
MDS-C1-V1- 01 03 05 10 20 35 45S 45 70S 70 90 110 150
unit type
Rated output [kW] 0.1 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.5 4.5 4.5 7.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 150
Rated
[V] 155AC
voltage
Output
Rated
[A] 0.95 2.9 3.4 6.8 13.0 19.0 28.0 28.0 33.5 33.5 42.0 68.0 87.0
current
Rated
[V] 270 to 311DC
voltage
Input
Rated
[A] 1 3 4 7 14 17 30 30 35 35 45 55 75
current
Voltage [V] 200/200 to 230AC
Control
Frequency [Hz] 50/60
power
Current [A] Max. 0.2
Control method Sine wave PWM control method, current control method
Braking Regenerative brakes and dynamic brakes
Dynamic brakes Built-in External
External analog output 0 to +5V, 2ch (data for various adjustments)
Structure Protection type (Protection method: IP20)
Ambient Operation: 0 to 55°C (non freezing),
temperature Storage/ Transportation: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)
Ambient humidity
Environ- Storage/ Transportation: 90%RH or less (non condensing)
Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level,
Altitude
Transportation: 10000 meters or less above sea level
Vibration/impact 4.9m/s2 (0.5G) / 49m/s2 (5.0G)
Forced wind
Cooling method Self-cooling cooling Forced wind cooling (fin)
(internal)
Weight [kg] 2.1 3.8 4.5 4.9 5.8 6.4
Heat radiated at
[W] 21 27 37 53 91 132 158 185 189 284 331 465 641
rated output
Noise Less than 55dB
(Note) The drive unit, within the same capacity, which has a shorter width is indicated with an "S" at the end of the type.
Note that limits apply to continuous operation of the 45S and 70S types.
2 - 20
2. Specifications
2) 2-axis servo drive unit

Servo drive unit
MDS-C1-V2- 0101 0301 0303 0501 0503 0505 1003 1005 1010 2010 2020 3510S 3510
type
0.1 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 3.5
Rated output [kW] + + + + + + + + + + + + +
0.1 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0
Rated voltage [V] 155AC
Output 0.95 2.9 2.9 3.4 3.4 3.4 6.8 6.8 6.8 13.0 13.0 16.0 16.0
Rated current [A] + + + + + + + + + + + + +
0.95 0.95 2.9 0.95 2.9 3.4 2.9 3.4 6.8 6.8 13.0 6.8 6.8
Rated voltage [V] 270 to 311DC
Input
Rated current [A] 2 4 6 5 7 8 10 11 14 21 28 24 24
Control
power
Braking Regenerative breakes
Dynamic brakes Built-in
Ambient temperature Operation: 0 to 55°C (non freezing), Storage/ Transportation: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)
Ambient humidity Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing), Storage/ Transportation: 90%RH or less (non condensing)
Environ- Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust
ment Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level,
Altitude
Cooling method Forced wind cooling (internal) Forced wind cooling (fin)
Weight [kg] 2.3 4.5 5.2
Heat radiated at rated
[W] 38 41 43 46 52 62 68 78 96 155 178 190 190
output

Servo drive unit
MDS-C1-V2- 3520S 3520 3535 4520 4535 4545S 4545 7035 7045 7070S 7070 9090S
type
3.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 9.0
Rated output [kW] + + + + + + + + + + + +
2.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 7.0 7.0 9.0
Rated voltage [V] 155AC
Output 16.0 16.0 16.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 33.5 33.5 33.5 33.5 40.8
Rated current [A] + + + + + + + + + + + +
13.0 13.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 28.0 28.0 16.0 28 33.5 33.5 40.8
Rated voltage [V] 270 to 311DC
Input
Rated current [A] 31 31 34 44 47 60 60 52 64 70 70 90
Control
power
Dynamic brakes Built-in
Ambient temperature Operation: 0 to 55°C (non freezing), Storage/ Transportation: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)
Ambient humidity Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing), Storage/ Transportation: 90%RH or less (non condensing)
Environ- Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust
ment Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level,
Altitude
Cooling method Forced wind cooling (fin)
Weight [kg] 4.5 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 6.0 6.7 6.7 5.9 7.3 7.3
Heat radiated at rated
[W] 213 213 260 266 307 280 359 406 459 365 558 558
output
(Note) The drive unit, within the same capacity, which has a shorter width is indicated with an "S" at the end of the type.
Note that limits apply to continuous operation of the 4545S, 7070S and 9090S types.
2 - 21
2. Specifications
2-3-2 Spindle drive unit
(1) Specifications
Spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SP Series
MDS-C1-SP-
Spindle MDS-C1-SPH-
drive unit MDS-C1-SPX- 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150S 150 185 220 260 300
type MDS-C1-SPHX-
MDS-C1-SPM-
Rated output [kW] 0.1 0.3 0.5 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 26
Rated
[V] 155AC
voltage
Output
Rated
[A] 1.5 2.6 4.5 10.0 15.0 18 26 37 49 63 79 97 130
current
Rated
[V] 270 to 311DC
voltage
Input
Rated
[A] 1 4 7 13 17 20 30 41 58 76 95 115 144
current
Control
power
Braking Regenerative brakes
External analog output 0 to +10V, 2ch (speedometer output, load meter output, data for various adjustments)
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Cooling method Self-cooling Internal Forced wind cooling (fin)
Weight [kg] 2.1 3.8 4.4 4.7 5.7 6.5 6.3
Heat radiated at
[W] 30 40 49 69 79 108 137 181 188 235 342 366 483 620
rated output
(Note 1) The drive unit, within the same capacity, which has a shorter width is indicated with an "S" at the end of the type.
Note that limits apply to continuous operation of the 150S type.
(Note 2) The rated output capacity and speed for the combined motor apply for the listed power voltage and frequency. These values
are not guaranteed when the voltage drops.
2 - 22
2. Specifications
2-3-3 Power supply unit
(1) Specifications
Power supply unit MDS-C1-CV Series
Power
supply unit MDS-C1-CV- 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
type
Rated output [kW] 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0
Rated
[V] 200/200 to 230AC
voltage
Input Frequency [Hz] 50/60 Frequency fluctuation within ±3%
Rated
[A] 16 20 26 35 49 66 81 95 107 121
current
Rated
[V] 270 to 311DC
voltage
Output
Rated
[A] 17 20 30 41 58 76 95 115 144 164
current
Control
power
Main circuit method Converter with power regeneration circuit
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Forced wind
Self-
Cooling method cooling Forced wind cooling (fin)
cooling
(internal)
Weight [kg] 3.4 4.6 5.8 6.0 8.3 8.4 8.6 8.8
Heat radiated at
[W] 55 65 80 125 155 195 210 260 320 400
rated output
2 - 23
2. Specifications
2-3-4 AC reactor
An AC reactor must be installed for each power supply unit.
(1) Specifications
AC reactor
AC reactor type B-AL- 7.5K 11K 18.5K 30K 37K
Compatible
power
MDS-C1-CV- 37,55,75 110 150,185 220,260,300 370
supply unit
type
Rated capacity
[kW] 7.5 11 18.5 30 37
(30-minute rating)
Rated voltage [V] AC200/200 to 230
Rated current [A] 27 33 66 110 129
Frequency [Hz] 50/60 Frequency fluctuation within ±3%
Ambient Operation: -10 to 60°C (with no freezing),
temperature Storage/Transportation: -10°C to 60°C (with no freezing)
Operation: 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation),
Ambient humidity
Storage/Transportation: 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Environ-
Indoors (no direct sunlight)
ment Atmosphere
With no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust
Altitude
Vibration/impact 9.8m/s2 (1G) / 98m/s2 (10G)
Weight [kg] 3.6 3.0 5.2 6.0 10
2 - 24
2. Specifications
2-3-5 D/A output specifications for servo drive unit
(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation
No. of channels 2ch
Output cycle 888µs (min. value)
Output precision 8bit CN9 connector
Output voltage range 0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V Pin Name Pin Name
Output magnification 1 LG 11 LG
±1/256 to ±128-fold
setting 2 12
CN9 connector 3 13
4 14
MO1 = Pin 9
Output pin 5 15
MO2 = Pin 19
6 MUIFB 16 MVIFB
GND = Pins 1, 11 7 LUIFB 17 LVIFB
Phase current feedback output function 8 18
L axis U phase current FB : Pin 7 9 MO1 19 MO2
Function L axis V phase current FB : Pin 17 10 20
M axis U phase current FB : Pin 6
M axis V phase current FB : Pin 16
The D/A output for the 2-axis drive unit
(MDS-C1-V2) is also 2ch. When using
Others the 2-axis drive unit, set -1 for the output
data (SV061, 62) of the axis that is not
to be measured.
MDS-C1-V2
(2) Output data settings

No. Abbrev. Parameter name Explanation
SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
Output magnification
standard setting value Output unit for standard Output
No. Output data Original data unit
setting cycle
(SV063, SV064)
For 2-axis drive unit (MDS-C1-V2). Set the parameters to another axis in the drive unit that is not D/A
-1 D/A output not selected
output.
13 (2000rpm) 1000rpm/V 3.55ms
ch1: Speed feedback r/min
0 9 (3000rpm) 1500rpm/V 3.55ms
ch2: Current command Stall % 131 Stall 100%/V 3.55ms
1 Current command Stall % 131 Stall 100%/V 3.55ms
2 –
3 Current feedback Stall % 131 Stall 100%/V 3.55ms
4 –
5 –
6 Position droop NC display unit/2 328 (Display unit = 1µm) 10µm/0.5V 3.55ms
7 –
(NC disiplay unit/2)/
8 Feedrate (F∆T) 55 (1µm, 3.5ms) 1000 (mm/min)/0.5V 3.55ms
Communication cycle
9 –
10 Position command NC display unit/2 328 (Display unit = 1µm) 10µm/0.5V 3.55ms
11 –
12 Position feedback NC display unit/2 328 (Display unit = 1µm) 10µm/0.5V 3.55ms
13 –
Collision detection estimated
14 Stall % 131 Stall 100%/V 3.55ms
torque
Collision detection disturbance
15 Stall % 131 Stall 100%/V 3.55ms
torque
64 Current command (high-speed) Internal unit 8 (adjustments required) – 888µs
65 Current feedback (high-speed) Internal unit 8 (adjustments required) – 888µs
77 Estimated disturbance torque Internal unit 8 (adjustments required) – 888µs
125 Test output saw tooth wave 0V to 5V 0 (256) Cycle: 227.5ms 888µs
126 Test output oblong wave 0V to 5V 0 (256) Cycle 1.7ms 888µs
127 Test output 2.5V (data 0) 2.5V 0 (256) - 888µs
2 - 25
2. Specifications
2-3-6 D/A output specifications for spindle drive unit
(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation
No. of channels 2ch
Output cycle 444µs (min. value)
Output precision 8bit
0V to +5V (zero) to +10V, CN9 connector
Output voltage range
0V to +10V for meter output Pin Name Pin Name
Output magnification 1 LG 11
±1/256 to ±128-fold 2 12
setting
3 13
CN9 connector
4 14
MO1 = Pin 9
Output pin 5 15
MO2 = Pin 19 6 16
GND = Pin 1 7 UIFB 17 VIFB
Phase current feedback output function 8 18
Function U phase current FB : Pin 7 9 MO1 19 MO2
V phase current FB : Pin 17 10 20
MDS-C1-SP
(2) Setting the output data
SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No. 1deg=(64000÷65536)
Output magnification
standard setting value Output unit for standard Output
No. Output data Original data unit
setting cycle
(SP255, SP256)
ch1: Speedometer output 10V=max. speed (Zero=0V) 0 Depends on maximum speed 3.55ms
0
ch2: Load meter output 10V=120% load (Zero=0V) 0 30-minute rating 12%/V 3.55ms
1 –
2 Current command Rated 100%=4096 8 30-minute rating 20%/V 3.55ms
3 Current feedback Rated 100%=4096 8 30-minute rating 20%/V 3.55ms
4 Speed feedback r/min 13 500rpm/V 3.55ms
5 –
Position droop
6 0.001deg=64 10 (10.24) 0.01deg/V 888µs
(lower order 16bit)
Position droop
7 1deg=(64000÷65536) 671 10deg/V 888µs
(higher order 16bit)
Feedrate (F∆T) 173
8 0.001deg=64 10deg/min/V 888µs
(lower order 16bit) (at 3.5ms communication)
Feedrate (F∆T) 629
9 1deg=(64000÷65536) 500rpm/V 888µs
(higher order 16bit) (at 3.5ms communication)
Position command
10 0.001deg=64 10 (10.24) 0.01deg/V 888µs
(lower order 16bit)
Position command
11 1deg=(64000÷65536) 19 (18.64) 360deg/V 888µs
Position feedback
12 0.001deg=64 10 (0.24) 0.01deg/V 888µs
(lower order 16bit)
Position feedback
13 1deg=(64000÷65536) 19 (18.64) 360deg/V 888µs
80 Control input 1
81 Control input 2
82 Control input 3
83 Control input 4
HEX Bit correspondence 3.55ms
84 Control output 1
85 Control output 2
86 Control output 3
87 Control output 4
2 - 26
2. Specifications
2-3-7 Explanation of each part

(1) Explanation of each servo drive unit part
<1> <2> <1> <2>
<3> <4> <3> <4>
<5> <6> <5> <6>
<7> <11> <7> <11>

<8> <8>
<9> <10>
<12> <12>
<13> <13>
<15>
<14> <14>
<16> <16>
MDS-C1-V1 (1-axis servo drive unit) MDS-C1-V2 (2-axis servo drive unit)
The connector layout differs according to the unit being used. Refer to each unit's outline drawing
for details.
Each part name
Name Description
<1> LED --- Unit status indication LED
<2> SW1 --- Axis No. setting switch (Left: L axis, Right: M axis)
<3> CN1A --- NC or upward axis communication connector
Control circuit
<4> CN1B --- Battery unit/Terminator/Lower axis communication connector

<5> CN9 --- Analog output connector
<6> CN4 --- Power supply communication connector
<7> CN2L --- Motor end detector connection connector (L axis)
<8> CN3L --- Machine end detector connection connector (L axis)
<9> CN2M --- Motor end detector connection connector (M axis)
<10> CN3M --- Machine end detector connection connector (M axis)
<11> CN20 --- Electromagnetic/dynamic brake connector
<12> TE2 L+, L– Converter voltage input terminal (DC input)
Main circuit
<13> TE3 L11, L21 Control power input terminal (single-phase AC input)
<14> LU,LV,LW
TE1 Motor power output terminal (3-phase AC output)
<15> MU,MV,MW
<16> PE Grounding terminal
(Note) The connector names differ for the V1 drive unit. (CN2L/CN3L → CN2/CN3, CN2M/CN3M → Not mounted)
The MU, MV and MW terminals are not provided. The LU, LV and LW terminals are named U, V and W.
Screw size
1-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V1- 2-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V2-
0101 to 2020 3510 to
01 to 35, 4545 to
Type 45,70S 70 to 90 110 to 150 3510S, 4545S, 7070
45S 7045
3520S 7070S
Unit width (mm) 60 90 120 150 60 90 120 150
<12> L+, L– M6
<13> L11,L21 M4
<14> LU, LV, LW
M4 (Note) M5 M8 M4
<15> MU, MV, MW
<16> M4 M5 M8 M4
(Note) The V1-45S UVW terminal screw size is M5, the same as V1-45.
2 - 27
2. Specifications
(2) Explanation of each spindle drive unit part
<1> <2>
<3> <4>
<5> <6>
<7>
<8>
<9> <10>
<11>
<12>
<13>
<14>
MDS-C1-SP
for details.
Each part name

Name Description
<1> LED --- Unit status indication LED
<2> SW1 --- Axis No. setting switch
<3> CN1A --- NC or upward axis communication connector
Control circuit
<4> CN1B --- Battery unit/Terminator/Lower axis communication connector

<5> CN9 --- Analog output connector
<6> CN4 --- Power supply communication connector
<7> CN5 --- Internal PLG encoder connection connector
<8> CN6 --- Magnetic sensor connection connector
<9> CN7 --- C axis control encoder connection connector
<10> CN8 --- CNC connection connector
<11> TE2 L+, L– Converter voltage input terminal (DC input)
Main circuit
<12> TE3 L11, L21 Control power input terminal (single-phase AC input)
<13> TE1 U, V, W Motor power output terminal (3-phase AC output)
Screw size
Spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SP-
Type 04 to 37 55 to 110,150S 150 to 185 220 to 300
Unit width (mm) 60 90 120 150
<11> L+, L– M6
<12> L11,L21 M4
<13> U, V, W M4 M5 M8
<14> M4 M5 M8
2 - 28
2. Specifications
(3) Explanation of each power supply unit part
<1> <2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<7> <6>
<8>
<9>
<10>
<11>
MDS-C1-CV Bottom view
for details.
Each part name

Name Description
<1> LED --- Power supply status indication LED
Control circuit
<2> SW1 --- Power supply setting switch

<3> CN4 --- Servo/spindle communication connector (master)
<4> CN9 --- Servo/spindle communication connector (slave)
<5> --- CHARGE LAMP TE2 output charging/discharging circuit indication LED
<6> CN23 --- External emergency stop input connector
<7> TE2 L+, L– Converter voltage output terminal (DC output)
Main circuit
<8> L11, L21 Control power input terminal (single-phase AC input)

TE3
<9> MC1 External contactor control terminal
<10> TE1 L1, L2, L3 Power input terminal (3-phase AC input)
(Note) CN23 is located at the bottom of the power supply unit.
Screw size
Power supply unit MDS-C1-CV-
Type 37 to 75 110 150 to 185 220 to 370
Unit width (mm) 60 90 120 150
<7> L+, L– M6
<8> L11, L21 M4
<9> MC1 M4
<10> L1, L2, L3 M4 M5 M8
<11> M4 M5 M8
2 - 29
2. Specifications
2-4 Restrictions on servo control

There may be some restrictions on mechanical specifications and electrical specifications when
executing servo controls. Always read this section when designing machines and confirm that no
problems exist with the specifications.
2-4-1 Restrictions of electronic gear setting value
The servo drive unit has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted into a
detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios
calculated from multiple parameters as shown below, and each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be 32767 or
less.
If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No. 101 (2301 with
M60S/E60 Series NC) will be output.
If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications (such as resolution of the
detector) must be revised so that the electronic gears are within the specifications range.
(1) For semi-closed loop control
ELG1 PC2 × RNG1

Reduced fraction of ELG2 = PC1 × PIT × IUNIT (reduced fraction)
IUNIT = 2/NC command unit (µm)

1µm : IUNIT = 2, 0.1µm : IUNIT = 20
When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

ELG1 ≤ 32767
ELG2 ≤ 32767
(2) For full-closed loop control
PGNX PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1

Reduced fraction of PGNY = PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)

PGNX ≤ 32767
PGNY ≤ 32767
And,
PGNXsp PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1sp
Reduced fraction of PGNYsp = PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)

PGNXsp ≤ 32767
PGNYsp ≤ 32767
If the electronic gears overflow, the alarm 37 or error parameter No. 101 (2301
POINT with M60S/E60 series NC) will be output.
2 - 30
2. Specifications
(3) Electronic gear related parameters
Setting
range (Unit)
SV001 PC1 Motor side gear ratio Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. 1 to 32767
For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.
Machine side gear Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may
SV002 PC2 1 to 32767
ratio overflow and cause an alarm.
Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33".
The higher the setting value is, the more precisely the command can be
1 to 200
SV003 PGN1 Position loop gain 1 followed and the shorter the positioning time gets, however, note that a
(rad/s)
bigger shock is applied to the machine during acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
1 to 32767
SV018 PIT Ball screw pitch Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis.
(mm/rev)
In the case of the semi-closed loop control
1 to 9999
Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (Refer to the explanation of
(kp/rev)
SV020.)
In the case of the full-closed loop control
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch.
Detector model name Resolution SV019 setting
OHE25K-ET, OHA25K-ET 100,000 (p/rev) 100
OSE104-ET,OSA104-ET 100,000 (p/rev) 100
OSE105-ET,OSA105-ET 1,000,000 (p/rev) 1000
RCN723 (Heidenhain) 8,000,000 (p/rev) 8000
Relative position detection Refer to specification PIT/Resolution
scale manual for each detector (µm)
Position detector The same as
SV019 RNG1 AT41 (Mitsutoyo) 1 (µm/p)
resolution SV018 (PIT) 1 to 9999
FME type, FLE type Refer to specification PIT/Resolution
(kp/pit)
(Futaba) manual for each detector (µm)
MP type (Mitsubishi Heavy Refer to specification PIT/Resolution
Industries) manual for each detector (µm)
Twice as big as
AT342 (Mitsutoyo) 0.5 (µm/p)
SV018 (PIT)
20 times as big as
AT343 (Mitsutoyo) 0.05 (µm/p)
SV018 (PIT)
Refer to specification PIT/Resolution
LC191M (Heidenhain)
manual for each detector. (µm)
Refer to specification PIT/Resolution
LC491M (Heidenhain)
manual for each detector. (µm)
Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor end detector.
Detector model name SV020 setting 1 to 9999
Speed detector
SV020 RNG2 OSE104, OSA104 100
resolution (kp/rev)
OSE105, OSA105 1000
Set the position loop gain during the synchronous tapping control.
Position loop gain 1 Set the same value as the value of the spindle parameter, position loop gain
1 to 200
SV049 PGN1sp in spindle in synchronous control.
synchronous control When performing the SHG control, set this with SV050 (PGN2sp) and (rad/s)
SV058 (SHGCsp).
2 - 31
2. Specifications
2-4-2 Restrictions on absolute position control
When executing absolute position control, the following conditions must be satisfied. If not satisfied,
mechanical specifications and electrical specifications (such as resolution of the detector) must be
revised.
When executing incremental control, there are no particular restrictions on servo control. (Confirm with
the NC system side specifications.)
(1) For linear axis

The following conditions, Condition 1 and 2, must be satisfied simultaneously.
(Condition 1)
2147
Length of stroke ≤ [m]
IUNIT
IUNIT = 2/NC command unit (µm)

1µm : IUNIT = 2， 0.1µm : IUNIT = 20
(Condition 2)
(a) For semi-closed loop control
PC1 x PIT
Length of stroke ≤ 2147 x [m]
PC2 x RNG2
(b) For full-closed loop control
PIT
Length of stroke ≤ 2147 x [m]
RNG1
(Note) Even during the full-closed loop control, when the MP scale is used, restrictions are applied
with the condition (a), as well.
(2) For rotary axis

The following conditions must be satisfied.
2147000
PC2 ≤ x PC1
RNG2
2 - 32
3. Characteristics
3-1 Servomotor......................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3-1-1 Environmental conditions ............................................................................................................ 3-2
3-1-2 Quakeproof level ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-3 Shaft characteristics .................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-4 Oil/water standards ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-1-5 Magnetic brake............................................................................................................................ 3-5
3-1-6 Dynamic brake characteristics .................................................................................................... 3-8
3-2 Spindle motor ................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3-2-1 Environmental conditions .......................................................................................................... 3-10
3-2-2 Shaft characteristics .................................................................................................................. 3-10
3-3 Drive unit characteristics .................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-3-1 Environmental conditions .......................................................................................................... 3-11
3-3-2 Heating value............................................................................................................................. 3-12
3-3-3 Overload protection characteristics........................................................................................... 3-13
3-1
3. Characteristics
3-1 Servomotor
3-1-1 Environmental conditions
Environment Conditions
Ambient temperature 0°C to +40°C (with no freezing)
Ambient humidity 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Storage temperature –15°C to +70°C (with no freezing)
Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight)
Atmosphere
No corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil mist or dust
Operation/storage: 1000m or less above sea level
Altitude
Transportation: 10000m or less above sea level
3-1-2 Quakeproof level
Acceleration direction
Motor type Direction at right angle
Axis direction (X)
to axis (Y)
HC52 to HC152, HC53 to HC153 2 2
9.8m/s (1G) or less 24.5m/s (2.5G) or less
HC103R to HC503R, HA053N to HA33N
2 2
HC202, HC352, HC203, HC353 19.6m/s (2G) or less 49.0m/s (5G) or less
HC452, HC702, HC453, HC703 2 2
11.7m/s (1.2G) or less 29.4m/s (3G) or less
HA-LF11K2-S8, HA-LF15K2-S8
2 2
HC902 9.8m/s (1G) or less 24.5m/s (2.5G) or less
The vibration conditions are as shown below.
200 Servomotor
(double-sway width) (µm)
100
80 X Y
Vibration amplitude
60
50
40
30 Acceleration
20
0 1000 2000 3000

Speed (r/min)
3-2
3. Characteristics
3-1-3 Shaft characteristics
There is a limit to the load that can be applied on the motor shaft. Make sure that the load applied on the
radial direction and thrust direction, when mounted on the machine, is below the tolerable values given
below. These loads may affect the motor output torque, so consider them when designing the machine.
Servomotor Tolerable radial load Tolerable thrust load

HA053NS,HA13NS 78.4N (L=26) 49N
HA23NS,HA33NS
245N (L=30) 147N
HA23NT,HA33NT
HC103RT,HC153RT,HC203RT 392N (L=45) 196N
HC52T,HC102T,HC152T
392N (L=58) 490N
HC53T,HC103T,HC153T
HC103RS,HC153RS,HC203RS 686N (L=45) 196N
HC353RS,HC503RS 980N (L=63) 392N
HC52S,HC102S,HC152S
980N (L=55) 490N
HC53S,HC103S,HC153S
HC202S,HC352S,HC452S,HC702S
2058N (L=79) 980N
HC203S,HC353S,HC453S,HC703S
HC902S
2450N (L=85) 980N
HA-LF11K2-S8
HA-LF15K2-S8 2940N (L=100) 980N
Note: The symbol L in the table refers to the value of L below.

L
Radial load
Thrust load
L : Length from flange installation surface to center of load weight [mm]
1. Use a flexible coupling when connecting with a ball screw, etc., and keep the
shaft core deviation to below the tolerable radial load of the shaft.
2. When directly installing the gear on the motor shaft, the radial load increases
as the diameter of the gear decreases. This should be carefully considered
when designing the machine.
3. When directly installing the pulley on the motor shaft, carefully consider so
CAUTION that the radial load (double the tension) generated from the timing belt
tension is less than the values shown in the table above.
4. In machines where thrust loads such as a worm gear are applied, carefully
consider providing separate bearings, etc., on the machine side so that loads
exceeding the tolerable thrust loads are not applied to the motor.
5. Do not use a rigid coupling as an excessive bending load will be applied on
the shaft and could cause the shaft to break.
3-3
3. Characteristics
3-1-4 Oil/water standards

Oil or water
(1) The motor protective format (refer to "2-1-1 Specifications list.") uses
the IP type, which complies with IE Standard. However, these
Standards are short-term performance specifications. They do not
guarantee continuous environmental protection characteristics.
Measures such as covers, etc., must be taken if there is any possibility
that oil or water will fall on the motor, and the motor will be constantly
wet and permeated by water. Note that the motor’s IP-type is not
indicated as corrosion-resistant. Servomotor
(2) When a gear box is installed on the servomotor, make sure that the oil level height from the center
of the shaft is higher than the values given below. Open a breathing hole on the gear box so that the
inner pressure does not rise.
Servomotor Oil level (mm)

HA053N, HA13N 8
HA23N, HA33N 10
HC52, HC102, HC152 Gear
HC53, HC103, HC153 Servomotor
20
HC103R, HC153R, HC203R
Oil level
HC353R, HC503R
HC202, HC352, HC452, HC702 Lip
25
HC203, HC353, HC453, HC703 V-ring
HC902 30
HA-LF11K2-S8 34
HA-LF15K2-S8 48
(3) When installing the servomotor horizontally, set the power cable and detector cable to face
downward.
When installing vertically or on an inclination, provide a cable trap.
Cable trap
1. The servomotors, including those having IP65 specifications, do not have a

completely waterproof (oil-proof) structure. Do not allow oil or water to
constantly contact the motor, enter the motor, or accumulate on the motor. Oil
can also enter the motor through cutting chip accumulation, so be careful of
CAUTION this also.
2. When the motor is installed facing upwards, take measures on the machine
side so that gear oil, etc., does not flow onto the motor shaft.
3. Do not remove the detector from the motor. (The detector installation screw is
treated for sealing.)
3-4
3. Characteristics
3-1-5 Magnetic brake
1. The axis will not be mechanically held even when the dynamic brakes are
used. If the machine could drop when the power fails, use a servomotor with
magnetic brakes or provide an external brake mechanism as holding means
to prevent dropping.
2. The magnetic brakes are used for holding, and must not be used for normal
braking. There may be cases when holding is not possible due to the life or
machine structure (when ball screw and servomotor are coupled with a timing
CAUTION belt, etc.). Provide a stop device on the machine side to ensure safety.
3. When operating the brakes, always turn the servo OFF (or ready OFF). When
releasing the brakes, always confirm that the servo is ON first. Sequence
control considering this condition is possible by using the motor brake control
output (CN20) on the servo drive unit.
4. When the vertical axis drop prevention function is used, the drop of the
vertical axis during an emergency stop can be suppressed to the minimum.
(1) Motor with magnetic brake

(a) Types
The motor with a magnetic brake is set for each motor. The "B" following the standard motor
model stands for the motor with a brake.
(b) Applications
When this type of motor is used for the vertical feed axis in a machining center, etc., slipping
and dropping of the spindle head can be prevented even when the hydraulic balancer's
hydraulic pressure reaches zero when the power turns OFF. When used with a robot, deviation
of the posture when the power is turned OFF can be prevented.
When used for the feed axis of a grinding machine, a double safety measures is formed with
the deceleration stop (dynamic brake stop) during emergency stop, and the risks of colliding
with the grinding stone and scattering can be prevented.
This motor cannot be used for the purposes other than holding and braking during a power
failure (emergency stop). (This cannot be used for normal deceleration, etc.)
(c) Features
1) The magnetic brakes use a DC excitation method, thus:
• The brake mechanism is simple and the reliability is high.
• There is no need to change the brake tap between 50Hz and 60Hz.
• There is no rush current when the excitation occurs, and shock does not occur.
• The brake section is not larger than the motor section.
2) The magnetic brake is built into the motor, and the installation dimensions are the same as
the motor without brake.
(d) Considerations to safety
1) When using a timing belt, connecting the motor with magnetic brakes and the load (ball
screw, etc.) with a timing belt as shown on the left below could pose a hazard if the belt
snaps. Even if the belt's safety coefficient is increased, the belt could snap if the tension is
too high or if cutting chips get imbedded. Safety can be maintained by applying the
configuration shown on the right below.
Dangerous! Safe!
Top Top
Motor Brake
Load
Load
Bottom Bottom
Motor
(No brakes)
Ball screw Ball screw
Timing belt Brake
Timing belt
3-5
3. Characteristics
(2) Magnetic brake characteristics

Motor model HC52B HC53B HC202B HC203B HC103RB HC353RB
HC102B HC103B HC352B HC353B HC153RB HC503RB
HC152B HC153B HC452B HC453B HC203RB
HC702B HC703B
Item HC902B
Type (Note 1) Spring braking type safety brakes
Rated voltage 24VDC
Rated current at 20°C (A) 0.80 1.43 0.8 0.96
Excitation coil resistance at 20°C (Ω) 29 16.8 30 25
Capacity (W) 19 34 19 23
Attraction current (A) 0.2 0.4 0.25 0.24
Dropping current (A) 0.08 0.2 0.085 0.10
Static friction torque (N·m) 8.3 43.1 6.8 16.7
2
Inertia (Note 2) (kg·cm ) 2.0 10 0.35 3.5
Release delay time (Note 3) (s) 0.04 0.1 0.03 0.04
Braking delay AC OFF (s) 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12
time (Note 3) DC OFF (s) 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
Tolerable Per braking (J) 400 4,500 400 400
braking work
Per hour (J) 4,000 45,000 4,000 4,000
amount
Brake play at motor axis (degree) 0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6
No. of braking
(times) 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Brake life operations
(Note 4) Work amount
(J) 200 1,000 200 200
per braking
Motor model HA053B HA23NB HA-LF11K2B-S8 HA-LF15K2B-S8

Item HA13B HA33NB
Type (Note 1) Spring braking type safety brakes

Rated voltage 24VDC
Rated current at 20°C (A) 0.5 0.7 1.3 1.9
Excitation coil resistance at 20°C (Ω) 111 49 19 12.4
Capacity (W) 12 17 30 46
Attraction current (A) 0.15 0.2 0.50 0.65
Dropping current (A) 0.06 0.06 0.20 0.25
Static friction torque (N·m) 0.39 1.96 82 160.5
2
Inertia (Note 2) (kg·cm ) 0.02 0.20 11.1 54
Release delay time (Note 3) (s) 0.03 0.05 0.25 0.30
Braking delay AC OFF (s) 0.20 0.10 0.15 0.20
time (Note 3) DC OFF (s) 0.03 0.02 0.04 0.04
Tolerable Per braking (J) 49.0 5.6 3,000 5,000
braking work
Per hour (J) 490.3 55.9 30,000 50,000
amount
Brake play at motor axis (degree) 0.25 to 2.5 0.2 to 1.5 0.05 to 0.26 0.03 to 0.18
No. of braking
(times) 30,000 30,000 20,000 20,000
Brake life operations
(Note 4) Work amount
(J) 49.0 5.6 1,000 3,000
per braking
Notes:
1. There is no manual release mechanism. If handling is required such as during the machine core
alignment work, prepare a separate 24VDC power supply, and electrically release a brake.
2. These are the values added to the servomotor without a brake.
3. This is the representative value for the initial attraction gap at 20°C.
4. The brake gap will widen through brake lining wear caused by braking. However, the gap cannot
be adjusted. Thus, the brake life is considered to be reached when adjustments are required.
5. A leakage flux will be generated at the shaft end of the servomotor with a magnetic brake.
6. When operating in low speed regions, the sound of loose brake lining may be heard. However, this
is not a problem in terms of function.
3-6
3. Characteristics
(3) Magnetic brake power supply
1. Always install a surge absorber on the brake terminal when using DC OFF.
CAUTION 2. Do not pull out the cannon plug while the brake power is ON. The cannon
plug pins could be damaged by sparks.
(a) Brake excitation power supply

1) Prepare a brake excitation power supply that can accurately ensure the attraction current
in consideration of the voltage fluctuation and excitation coil temperature.
2) The brake terminal polarity is random. Make sure not to mistake the terminals with other
circuits.
(b) Brake excitation circuit

1) AC OFF and 2) DC OFF can be used to turn OFF the brake excitation power supply (to apply
the brake).
1) AC OFF
The braking delay time will be longer, but the excitation circuit will be simple, and the relay
cut off capacity can be decreased.
2) DC OFF
The braking delay time can be shortened, but a surge absorber will be required and the
relay cut off capacity will be increased.
<Cautions>
• Provide sufficient DC cut off capacity at the contact.
• Always use a surge absorber.
• When using the cannon plug type, the surge absorber will be further away, so use
shielded wires between the motor and surge absorber.
SW 24VDC 24VDC
SW1 SW2
Magnetic brake 1
Magnetic brake 2
ZD1
100VAC or
200VAC PS Magnetic 100VAC or
PS
brake 200VAC VAR1 VAR2
ZD2
(a) Example of AC OFF (b) Example of DC OFF

PS : 24VDC stabilized power supply
ZD1, ZD2 : Zener diode for power supply protection (1W,24V)
ex. made by Renesas HZ24
VAR1, VAR2 : Surge absorber (220V)
Magnetic brake circuits
3-7
3. Characteristics
3-1-6 Dynamic brake characteristics
If a servo alarm that cannot control the motor occurs, the dynamic brakes will function to stop the
servomotor regardless of the parameter settings.
(1) Deceleration torque

The dynamic brake uses the motor as a generator, and obtains the deceleration torque by
consuming that energy with the dynamic brake resistance. The characteristics of this deceleration
torque have a maximum deceleration torque (Tdp) regarding the motor speed as shown in the
following drawing. The torque for each motor is shown in the following table.
Tdp
Deceleration
torque
0 Ndp
Motor speed
Deceleration torque characteristics of a dynamic brake
Max. deceleration torque of a dynamic brake
Motor type Stall torque (N.m) Tdp (N.m) Ndp (r/min)

HC52 2.94 4.79 669
HC102 5.88 11.19 884
HC152 8.82 18.49 1062
HC202 13.72 10.56 457
HC352 22.50 23.79 716
HC452 37.20 47.88 1459
HC702 49.00 62.05 1641
HC902 58.80 85.36 2109
HC53 2.94 5.08 899
HC103 5.88 10.72 1045
HC153 8.82 18.88 1676
HC203 13.72 9.85 728
HC353 22.50 21.67 1215
HC453 37.20 40.63 2109
HC703 49.00 57.91 2531
HC103R 3.18 3.67 582

HC153R 4.78 5.44 668
HC203R 6.37 7.16 973
HC353R 11.10 10.18 1215
HC503R 15.90 15.97 1432
HA053N 0.25 0.21 2686

HA13N 0.49 0.49 2056
HA23N 0.98 1.14 1205
HA33N 1.96 2.30 823
HA-LF11K2-S8 70.60 72.22 1225
HA-LF15K2-S8 91.70 110.19 1494
3-8
3. Characteristics
(2) Coasting rotation distance during emergency stop

The distance that the motor coasts (angle for rotary axis) when stopping with the dynamic brakes
can be approximated with the following expression.
JL
LMAX = F ▪ {te + (1 + ) ▪ (A ▪ N2 + B)}
60 JM
LMAX : Motor coasting distance (angle) [mm, (deg)]
F : Axis feedrate [mm/min, (deg/min)]
N : Motor speed [r/m]
JM : Motor inertia [kg.cm2]
JL : Motor shaft conversion load inertia [kg.cm2]
te : Brake drive relay delay time (s) (Normally, 0.03s)
A : Coefficient A (Refer to the table below)
B : Coefficient B (Refer to the table below)
OFF
Emergency stop (EMG) ON
Dynamic brake control output OFF

ON
Actual dynamic brake operation OFF

ON
Motor speed
Motor speed: N
Coasting amount
Time
te
Dynamic brake braking diagram

Coasting amount calculation coefficients table
JM JM
Motor type A B Motor type A B
(kg·cm2) (kg·cm2)
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC52 6.6 3.59×10 4.83×10 HC103R 1.5 1.23×10 1.24×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC102 13.6 2.40×10 5.63×10 HC153R 1.9 0.91×10 1.22×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC152 20.0 1.78×10 6.02×10 HC203R 2.3 0.58×10 1.64×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC202 42.5 15.36×10 9.64×10 HC353R 8.3 1.17×10 5.19×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC352 82.0 8.40×10 12.93×10 HC503R 12.0 0.92×10 5.64×10
-9 -3
HC452 121.0 3.02×10 19.30×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC702 160.0 2.74×10 22.16×10 HA053N 0.19 0.15×10 13.01×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC902 204.0 1.98×10 26.39×10 HA13N 0.37 0.16×10 8.18×10
-9 -3
HA23N 0.98 0.31×10 5.43×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC53 6.6 2.52×10 6.11×10 HA33N 1.96 0.45×10 3.67×10
-9 -3
HC103 13.6 2.12×10 6.95×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC153 20.0 1.10×10 9.29×10 HA-LF11K2-S8 105 2.07×10 9.32×10
-9 -3 -9 -3
HC203 42.5 10.34×10 16.45×10 HA-LF15K2-S8 220 2.33×10 15.62×10
-9 -3
HC353 82.0 5.43×10 24.08×10
-9 -3
HC453 121.0 2.46×10 32.88×10
-9 -3
HC703 160.0 1.91×10 36.61×10
3-9
3. Characteristics
3-2 Spindle motor
Indoors (no direct sunlight);
Atmosphere
no corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil mist or dust
Altitude
3-2-2 Shaft characteristics
There is a limit to the load that can be applied on the motor shaft. Make sure that the load applied on the
radial direction, when mounted on the machine, is below the tolerable values given below. These loads
may affect the motor output torque, so consider them when designing the machine.
Spindle motor Tolerable radial load

SJ-V3.7-02ZM 490 N
SJ-V2.2-01, SJ-V3.7-01
980 N
SJ-V7.5-03ZM, SJ-V11-06ZM
SJ-V5.5-01, SJ-V11-08ZM
1470 N
SJ-PMF01830-00
SJ-V7.5-01, SJ-V11-01
1960 N
SJ-V22-06ZM, SJ-V30-02ZM, SJ-PMF03530-00
SJ-V11-09, SJ-V15-01, SJ-V15-03, SJ-V18.5-01, SJ-V18.5-03
2940 N
SJ-V22-01, SJ-V22-05, SJ-V26-01, SJ-30A
SJ-22XW5 3920 N
SJ-37BP 4900 N
SJ-22XW8, SJ-45BP
5880 N
SJ-V55-01
Radial load
The load point is at the one-half of the shaft length.
3 - 10
3. Characteristics
3-3 Drive unit characteristics
Indoors (no direct sunlight);
Atmosphere
no corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil mist or dust
Altitude
2
Operation/storage: 4.9m/s (0.5G) or less
Vibration 2
Transportation: 49m/s (5G) or less
(Note) When installing the machine at 1,000m or more above sea level, the heat dissipation
characteristics will drop as the altitude increases. The upper limit of the ambient
temperature drops 1°C with every 100m increase in altitude. (The ambient temperature at
an altitude of 2,000m is between 0 and 45°C.)
3 - 11
3. Characteristics
3-3-2 Heating value
Each heating value is calculated with the following values.

The values for the servo drive unit apply at the stall output. The values for the spindle drive unit apply for
the continuous rated output. The values for the power supply unit include the AC reactor's heating value.
Servo drive unit Spindle drive unit Power supply unit

Heating value Heating value Heating value Heating value
Type [W] Type [W] Type [W] Type [W]
MDS-C1- Inside Outside MDS-C1- Inside Outside MDS-C1- Inside Outside MDS-C1- Inside Outside
panel panel panel panel panel panel panel panel
V1- 01 21 0 V2-0101 38 0 SP- 04 30 0 CV- 37 21 34
V1- 03 27 0 V2-0301 41 0 SP- 075 40 0 CV- 55 23 42
V1- 05 37 0 V2-0303 43 0 SP- 15 49 0 CV- 75 25 55
V1- 10 53 0 V2-0501 46 0 SP- 22 26 42 CV-110 26 99
V1- 20 25 66 V2-0503 52 0 SP- 37 28 51 CV-150 29 126
V1- 35 30 102 V2-0505 62 0 SP- 55 31 76 CV-185 33 162
V1- 45S 34 124 V2-1005 78 0 SP- 75 35 102 CV-220 35 175
V1- 45 37 148 V2-1010 96 0 SP-110 41 140 CV-260 40 220
V1- 70S 38 151 V2-2010 37 117 SP-150S 48 140 CV-300 46 274
V1- 70 50 234 V2-2020 41 137 SP-150 48 187 CV-370 54 346
V1- 90 56 275 V2-3510S 44 146 SP-185 62 280
V1-110 74 392 V2-3510 42 148 SP-220 65 301
V1-150 96 545 V2-3520S 48 165 SP-260 80 403
V2-3520 45 168 SP-300 98 522
V2-3535 51 209
V2-4520 52 214
V2-4535 57 249
V2-4545S 55 225
V2-4545 64 295
V2-7035 70 336
V2-7045 77 382
V2-7070S 65 300
V2-7070 90 468
V2-9090S 65 300
(Note 1) The values for the spindle drive unit are the heating value at the continuous rated output, and
the values for the servo drive unit are the heating values at the stall output when operating in
the high-gain mode. The heating value when operating the servo drive unit in the standard
mode (MDS-B compatible mode) is lower than the MDS-B series heating value. However,
with the new design, the standard operation mode will not presumably be used, so the data
has been eliminated.
(Note 2) The total heating value for the power supply includes the heating value for the AC reactor.
(Note 3) The total heating value for the unit is the total sum of the heating values for the above
corresponding units which are mounted in the actual machine.
Example) When the CV-185, SP-110, V1-35, V2-2020 units are mounted
Unit total heating value (W) =195+181+132+178=686 (W)
(Note 4) When designing the panel for sealed mounting, take the actual load rate into consideration,
and calculate the heating value inside the servo drive unit panel with the following expression:
Heating value inside servo drive unit panel (considering load rate) = Heating value in panel
obtained from above table × 0.5
(Note that this excludes the power supply unit and spindle drive unit.)
If the load rate is clearly larger than 0.5, substitute that load rate for (× 0.5) in the above
expression.
Example) When the V1-35 servo drive unit is mounted
Heating value in panel (at rated output) = 30(W)
Thus, the heating value in the panel (considering the load rate) is 30 × 0.5 = 15 (W)
3 - 12
3. Characteristics
3-3-3 Overload protection characteristics
The servo drive unit has an electronic thermal relay to protect the servomotor and servo drive unit from
overloads. The operation characteristics of the electronic thermal relay are shown below when standard
parameters (SV021=60, SV022=150) are set.
If overload operation over the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown below is carried out,
overload 1 (alarm 50) will occur. If the maximum current is commanded at 95% or higher continuously
for one second or more due to a machine collision, etc., overload 2 (alarm 51) will occur.
(1) Motor HC52
10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
Motor current (stall current %)
(2) Motor HC102
10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 13
3. Characteristics
(3) Motor HC152

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(4) Motor HC202

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(5) Motor HC352

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
Operation time (s)
When
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 14
3. Characteristics
(6) Motor HC452

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(7) Motor HC702

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
Operation time (s)
When
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(8) Motor HC902

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 15
3. Characteristics
(9) Motor HC53

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(10) Motor HC103

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(11) Motor HC153

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 16
3. Characteristics
(12) Motor HC203

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(13) Motor HC353

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(14) Motor HC453

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 17
3. Characteristics
(15) Motor HC703

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(16) Motor HC103R

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(17) Motor HC153R

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 18
3. Characteristics
(18) Motor HC203R

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(19) Motor HC353R

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(20) Motor HC503R

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 19
3. Characteristics
(21) Motor HA053N

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
When
Operation time (s)
stopped
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(22) Motor HA13N

10000.00
When
1000.00
rotating
When
Operation time (s)
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(23) Motor HA23N

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
Operation time (s)
When
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 20
3. Characteristics
(24) Motor HA33N

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
Operation time (s)
When
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(25) Motor HA-LF11K2-S8

10000.00
When
1000.00 rotating
Operation time (s)
When
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
(26) Motor HA-LF15K2-S8

10000.00
When
1000.00
rotating
When
Operation time (s)
100.00 stopped
10.00
1.00
0.10
0 100 200 300 400 500
3 - 21
4-1 Servo options ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1 Battery and terminator option (mandatory selection) ......................................................... 4-3
4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) (mandatory selection for large capacity) ..................... 4-5
4-1-3 Ball screw end detector...................................................................................................... 4-7
4-1-4 Machine end detector ........................................................................................................ 4-8
4-1-5 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR) ............................................................................. 4-10
4-1-6 Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD)........................................................................................ 4-12
4-2 Spindle option................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4-2-1 Magnetic sensor .............................................................................................................. 4-16
4-2-2 Spindle end detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8) ................................... 4-18
4-2-3 C-axis detector (OSE90K) ............................................................................................... 4-20
4-2-4 C-axis detector (MBE90K) ............................................................................................... 4-22
4-2-5 C-axis detector (MHE90K) ............................................................................................... 4-23
4-2-6 Spindle end PLG (MXE128/180/256/512) ........................................................................ 4-24
4-2-7 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX) ......................................................................... 4-28
4-3 Cables and connectors .................................................................................................................... 4-30
4-3-1 Cable connection diagram ............................................................................................... 4-30
4-3-2 List of cables and connectors .......................................................................................... 4-31
4-1
4-1 Servo options

The option units are required depending on the servo system configuration. Check the option units to be
required referring the following items.
(1) System configuration in the full closed loop control

Check the servo options required to execute the full closed loop control based on the following
table.
Motor side Need for detector Need for
Servo system
System configuration detector conversion unit battery unit
specifications
specifications (MDS-B-HR) (MDS-A-BT)
OSE104-ET, OSE105-ET Incremental × × Incremental
OSA104-ET, OSA105-ET Incremental × { Absolute position
Relative position linear scale
Incremental × × Incremental
(Oblong wave signal output）
Incremental { × Incremental
(SIN wave signal output)
AT41 (Mitsutoyo) Incremental × × Absolute position
FME, FML type (Futaba corporation) Incremental × × Absolute position
MP scale (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries) Absolute position × { Absolute position
AT342, AT343 (Mitsutoyo) Incremental × × Absolute position
LC191M, LC491M (HEIDENHAIN) Incremental × × Absolute position
RCN223, RCN723 (HEIDENHAIN) Incremental × × Absolute position
The absolute position system cannot be established in combination with the

relative position (incremental) machine side detector and absolute position
POINT motor side detector.
(2) System configuration in the synchronous control

(a) For position command synchronous control
The synchronous control is all executed in the NC, and the each servo is controlled as an
independent axis. Therefore, preparing special options for the synchronous control is not
required on the servo side.
(b) For speed/current command synchronous control

The signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD) may be required because two axes share the FB signal of
the motor detector or linear scale. Check whether the signal divider unit is required based on
the following table.
For control with MDS-C1-V2 For control with MDS-C1-V1×2 units

(small capacity) (large capacity)
System configuration Need for signal Need for detector Need for signal Need for detector
divider unit conversion unit divider unit conversion unit
(MDS-B-SD) (MDS-B-HR) (MDS-B-SD) (MDS-B-HR)
Semi closed control
× × { ×
(only for motor side detector)
× × { ×
(Oblong wave signal output)
× { × {
(SIN wave signal output)
AT41 (Mitsutoyo) × × { ×
FME, FML type (Futaba corporation) × × { ×
MP scale (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries) × × { ×
AT342, AT343 (Mitsutoyo) × × { ×
LC191M, LC491M (HEIDENHAIN) × × { ×
When executing the synchronous control, use the servomotors of which the type
POINT and detector specifications are same.
4-2
4-1-1 Battery and terminator option (mandatory selection)
A battery unit or terminator must be connected on each NC communication bus line. Select the unit
according to the system specifications.
(1) Terminator (A-TM)

Always connect the terminator to the last unit connected to the NC communication bus line. If there
are many axes and two NC communication bus line systems are in use, connect a terminator per
each system.
(a) Outline dimension drawing
• A-TM
11.5
20.9
42.0
33.0
29.7
[Unit: mm]
4-3
(2) Battery unit (MDS-A-BT)

This battery is installed outside the servo drive unit. This battery unit backs up the absolute position
data of the multiple servo axes connected to each NC bus line. This battery unit also functions as a
terminator.
(a) Specifications
Type MDS-A-BT-2 MDS-A-BT-4 MDS-A-BT-6 MDS-A-BT-8

Nominal voltage 3.6V
Nominal capacity 4000mAh 8000mAh 12000mAh 16000mAh
Number of backup axes Max. 7 axes in one part system (in same NC bus)
Battery continuous backup time Approx. 12,000 hours
Battery useful life 7 years from date of unit manufacture
Data save time during battery
HC, HCR, HAN, HA-LF: 20 hours at time of delivery, 10 hours after 5 years
replacement
Back up time from battery
Approx. 100 hours
warning to alarm occurrence
Number of backup axes 2 axes 4 axes 6 axes 7 axes
(b) Outline dimension drawings
• MDS-A-BT-2/-4/-6/-8
15 Use an M5 screw for the ø6 mounting hole
52
160
145
135
17
R3
6 100
30
[Unit: mm]
1. To protect the absolute position, do not shut off the servo drive unit control
power supply if the battery voltage becomes low (warning 9F).
2. The battery life will be greatly affected by the ambient temperature. The
CAUTION above data is the theoretical value for when the battery is used at an ambient
temperature of 25°C. If the ambient temperature rises, generally the backup
time and useful life will be shorter.
4-4
4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) (mandatory selection for large capacity)
The MDS-C1-V1-110/150 units do not have dynamic brakes built in, so install an external dynamic
brake unit.
(1) Specifications
Type Coil specifications Compatible drive unit Weight (kg)
MDS-B-DBU-150 24VDC 160mA MDS-C1-V1-110/150 2
(2) Outline dimension drawings

• MDS-B-DBU-150
20
10
200
190
180
FG a b 13 U V W
200
5
5 5
20 20
140
[Unit: mm]
4-5
(3) Connecting with the servo drive unit
External
power supply
24VDC GND
Brake connector
Pin Name CNU20S(AWG14)
(CN20)
1 24VDC 1
2 DBU 2
3 MBR 3 Control terminal
block (M3)
Terminal Name
1
Twist wire 2 NC
3 a
4 b
5 13
To a motor brake 6 14
U V W a b
Dynamic brake unit

(MDS-B-DBU)
Power terminal
block (M3) Terminal Name
1 U
Servomotor 2 V
3 W
Internal circuit diagram
Terminal
block
W
U
R (0.2Ω)
14
13
MC SK
a
Correctly wire the dynamic brake unit to the servo drive unit.
CAUTION Do not use for applications other than emergencies (normal braking, etc.). The
internal resistor could heat up, and lead to fires or faults.
When you use a motor with a brake, please wire (between 1pin and 3pin) for the
POINT CN20 connector.
4-6
4-1-3 Ball screw end detector
(1) Specifications
Type Type Maximum feedrate Detector output Detector resolution
Relative OSE104-ET 3000r/min Serial data 100,000p/rev
position detector OSE105-ET 3000r/min Serial data 1,000,000p/rev
Absolute OSA104-ET 3000r/min Serial data 100,000p/rev
position detector OSA105-ET 3000r/min Serial data 1,000,000p/rev

• OSA-ET/OSE-ET Series
85
60 30
45° 29
4-ø4.8 7 2
ø9.52 -0.008
0
14
A 8.72
ø75 -0.02
0
ø80 A
8.72
ø100
Cross section
58
A-A
22.5
Key MS3102A22-14 (19 pins)

position
38
[Unit: mm]
4-7
4-1-4 Machine end detector
All machine end detectors are optional parts, and must be prepared by the user.
(1) Relative position detector

Use a relative position detector for the machine end that satisfies the following "(a)" and "(b)"
according to the output signal specifications.
(a) Oblong wave output
Select a relative position detector with an A/B phase difference and Z-phase width at the
maximum feedrate that satisfies the following conditions.
Use an A, B, Z-phase signal type with differential output (RS-422 standard product) for the
output signal.
Output circuit Phase difference

A, B, Z-phase
A-phase
A, B, Z-phase B-phase
0.1µs or more
Z-phase
0.1µs or
more
Integer mm
For a scale having multiple Z phases, select the neighboring Z
phases whose distance is an integral mm.
(b) Analog wave output (using MDS-B-HR)

When using a relative position detector that the signal is the analog (SIN wave) output, the
detector output signal is converted in the detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR), and then the
signal is transmitted to the drive unit in the serial communication. Select a relative position
detector with A/B phase SIN wave signal that satisfies the following conditions.
(Output signal)
• 2.5V reference 1Vp-p analog A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase differential output
• Output signal frequency max 200kHz
Voltage [V]
A phase B phase
3
2.5
Time
A/B phase output signal waveform during forward run
4-8
(2) Absolute position detector

The applicable absolute position detectors are as follows.
Applicable absolute position detectors for the machine end

Type Manufacturer Maximum feedrate Detector output Detector resolution
AT41 A, B-phase 1µm/p after multiplying by four
Zero point indexing
Mitsutoyo 50m/min Z-phase
10mm spacing
Serial data Absolute position 1µm/p
FME, FML 5.1 to 120m/min 0.1 to 10µm/p after multiplying
A, B-phase
FUTABA Differs according to by four
the resolution. Serial data
MP scale A, B-phase 1µm/p after multiplying by four
∗ Motor end detector Mitsubishi Heavy
also needs an 30m/min Zero point indexing
Industries Z-phase
absolute position 2mm spacing
encoder.
AT342 Mitsutoyo 110m/min Serial data 0.5µm/p
AT343 Mitsutoyo 120m/min Serial data 0.05µm/p
LC191M HEIDENHAIN 120m/min Serial data 0.1µm/p
LC491M HEIDENHAIN 120m/min Serial data 0.05µm/p/0.1µm/p
RCN723 for rotating axis HEIDENHAIN 300r/min Serial data 8,000,000p/rev
RCN223 for rotating axis HEIDENHAIN 1500r/min Serial data 8,000,000p/rev
Confirm each manufacturer specifications before using the machine end

CAUTION detector.
4-9
4-1-5 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR)
This unit superimposes the scale analog output raw waves, and generates high resolution position data.
Increasing the detector resolution is effective for the servo high-gain. MDS-B-HR-12(P) is used for the
synchronous control system that 1-scale 2-drive operation is possible.
(1) Type configuration

MDS-B-HR- (1) (2)

Symbol Protective structure
None IP65
P IP67
(1) Signal division function class

Symbol Scale output voltage class
11 Output number 1
12 Output number 2 (with division)
(2) Specifications
Type MDS-B-HR- 11 12 11P 12P
Compatible scale (example) LS186 / LIDA181 / LIF181 (HEIDENHAIN)

Signal 2-division function × { × {
Analog signal input specifications A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase (2.5V reference Amplitude 1VP-P)
Compatible frequency Analog raw waveform max. 200kHz
Scale resolution Analog raw waveform/512 division
Input/output communication style High-speed serial communication I/F, RS485 or equivalent
Working ambient temperature 0 to 55°C
Working ambient humidity 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere No toxic gases
2
Tolerable vibration 98.0 m/s (10G)
2
Tolerable impact 294.0 m/s (30G)
Tolerable power voltage 5VDC±5%
Maximum heating value 2W
Weight 0.5kg or less
Protective structure IP65 IP67
4 - 10
(3) Unit outline dimension drawings

• MDS-B-HR
6.5 152 6.5 46
5
RM15WTR-10S
CON2
CON4
70
CON1
CON3
5
4- Ø5 hole RM15WTR-12S
RM15WTR-8Px2
165
Unit [mm]
(3) Explanation of connectors
Connector name Application Remarks
CON1 For connection with servo drive unit (2nd system) Not provided for 1-part system specifications
CON2 For connection with servo drive unit
CON3 For connection with scale
For connection with pole detection unit
CON4 *Used for linear servo system
(MDS-B-MD)
Connector pin layout

CON1 CON2 CON3 CON4
Pin No. Function Pin No. Function Pin No. Function Pin No. Function
1 RQ+ signal 1 RQ+ signal 1 A+ phase signal 1 A phase signal
2 RQ- signal 2 RQ- signal 2 A- phase signal 2 REF signal
3 SD+ signal 3 SD+ signal 3 B+ phase signal 3 B phase signal
4 SD- signal 4 SD- signal 4 B- phase signal 4 REF signal
5 P5 5 P5 5 Z+ phase signal 5 P24
6 P5 6 P5 6 Z- phase signal 6 MOH signal
7 GND 7 GND 7 RQ+ signal 7 P5
8 GND 8 GND 8 RQ- signal 8 P5
9 SD+ signal 9 TH signal
10 SD- signal 10 GND
11 P5
12 GND
Connector Type
1 7 8 9 1 8 1
CON1 RM15WTR- 8P 2 6 7 12 2 7 9 2
8
CON2 (Hirose Electric) 6 11
10
3 6 10 3
3 5
RM15WTR-12S 4 5 4 5 4
CON3
(Hirose Electric)
RM15WTR-10S CON1 CON3 CON4
CON4 CON2
(Hirose Electric)
4 - 11
4-1-6 Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD)
This unit has a function to divide the position and speed signals fed back from the high-speed serial
detector and high-speed serial linear scale. This unit is used to carry out synchronized control of the
motor with two MDS-C1-V1 drive units.
(1) Specifications
Type MDS-B-SD
Compatible servo drive unit MDS-C1-V1-
Tolerable vibration 98.0 m/s2 (10G)
Tolerable impact 294.0 m/s2 (30G)
Protective structure Protective type (protection method: IP20)
1. The MDS-B-SD unit divides the feed back signals from a motor side detector
(CN2 system) and from a machine end detector (CN3 system).
2. Always make sure that the CN2 system's CN2A and the CN3 system's CN3A
are always connected to the same servo drive unit. The CN2 system's CN2A
POINT and the CN3 system's CN3A cannot be connected to different servo drive
units.
3. Always provide one MDS-B-SD unit for one current/speed command
synchronous control operation.
4 - 12

• MDS-B-SD
Heat dissipation
allowance
100
40 135
Detector
CN2 CN3
Master axis
CN2A CN3A
168
Slave axis
CN2B CN3B
Heat dissipation and wiring

70
6
Wiring
allowance
allowance
150
156
2-M5-0.8 screw
34 6
Mounting hole Unit: [mm]
4 - 13
4-2 Spindle option

Select the spindle option to be required for the spindle control based on the following table.
(a) No-variable speed control

(When spindle and motor are directly coupled or coupled with a 1:1 gear ratio)
Without spindle
With spindle option
option
Spindle Motor
Control specifications Motor Spindle end Spindle
control item end PLG Magnetic C-axis
end PLG end
with sensor detector
PLG (MDS-C1-SPX) detector
Z-phase
Speed control Normal cutting control { { {
Constant surface speed
{ { {
control (lathe)
Thread cutting (lathe) × { {
Orientation 1-point orientation control × { {
control Multi-point orientation
× { {
control
Orientation indexing × { {
Synchronous Standard synchronous tap This normally is not used for no-variable
{ { {
tap control speed control.
Synchronous tap after zero
× { {
point return
Spindle Without phase alignment
{ { {
synchronous function
control With phase alignment
× { {
function
C-axis control Simple C-axis control
{ {
(without zero point return)
Not used
Simple C-axis control
× {
(with zero point return)
Standard C-axis control × × {
(Note) { : Control possible
× : Control not possible
4 - 14
(b) Variable speed control

(When using V-belt, or when spindle and motor are connected with a gear ratio
other than 1:1)
Without spindle
With spindle option
option
Spindle Motor
Control specifications Motor Spindle end Spindle
control item end PLG Magnetic C-axis
end PLG end
with sensor detector
PLG (MDS-C1-SPX) detector
Z-phase
Speed control Normal cutting control { { { { { {
Constant surface speed
U U U { { {
control (lathe)
Thread cutting (lathe) × × × { { {
Orientation 1-point orientation control × × { { { {
control Multi-point orientation
× × × { { {
control
Orientation indexing × × × { { {
Synchronous Standard synchronous tap S S S { { {
tap control Synchronous tap after zero
× × S { { {
point return
Spindle Without phase alignment
U U U { { {
synchronous function
control With phase alignment
× × × { { {
function
C-axis control Simple C-axis control
(without zero point return)
Simple C-axis control is not possible when using variable speed control.
Simple C-axis control
(with zero point return)
Standard C-axis control × × × × × U
(Note) { : Control possible
× : Control not possible
U : Control not possible when using V-belt
S : Control not possible when varying the speed with a method other than the gears (when using V-belt or timing belt).
4 - 15
4-2-1 Magnetic sensor
Prepare the magnetic sensor parts with the following types. When purchasing independently, always
prepare with the required configuration part types.
(1) Type
Tolerable Independent type
Type Type
speed [r/min] Drive unit Sensor Magnet
Standard MAGSENSOR BKO-C1810H01-3 0 to 6000 H01 H02 H03
High-speed standard MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.6 0 to 12000 H01 H02 H06
High-speed small MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.9 0 to 12000 H01 H02 H09
MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.41 0 to 25000 H01 H02 H41
High-speed ring
(Note) When preparing with independent types, replace the section following the H in the
prepared type with the independent type.
Example: When preparing only the standard magnetic sensor's sensor section, the
type will be MAGSENSOR BKO-C1810H02.
(2) Outline dimension drawing:
z Drive unit H01
2-ø5.5 hole 25
Connector (sensor side) Connector (controller cable side)

For BKO-C1810H01, R04-R08F is used. Unit side (TRC116-21A10-7M)
For BKO-C1730H01, TRC116-21A10-7F is used. Cable side (TRC116-12A100-7F10.5)
[Unit: mm]
z Sensor H02
32
Reference 14
notch 25 5.5
1 +100
Cable length 500 -0
5
17.5
30
20
25
ø6
18 Connector
For BKO-C1810H02, R04-R-8M is used.
For BKO-C1730H02, TRC116-12A10-7M is used.
[Unit: mm]
4 - 16
z Magnet
Part Tolerable
Outline drawings
No. speed
Reference hole
0 to 6000
H03
r/min
28
38
2.5
40
0 to 12000 4-ø4.3 hole Weight: 40 ± 1.5g
H06 50 7.5 Installation screw: M4
r/min
[Unit: mm]
S N 10
2-ø4.3 hole
50
0 to 12000 40
H09
r/min 30
Weight: 14.8 ± 0.7g
7
Installation screw: M4
1.6
N.P [Unit: mm]
Spun ring 4-F screw

D RINGFEDER
Cover RFN8006 J×K Stainless case
Case E SUS-303
0 to 25000
H41
r/min
øC
øB
øA
N 45°
Gap 1±0.1
2-øG±0.15øH
0 to 25000 Sensor head Stop position scale on circumference
H42
r/min
Reference ∗ Polarity (N,S) is indicated on the side wall of cover.
notch Detection head should be installed so that the reference
notch of sensor head comes on the case side.
Magnet [Unit: mm]

Dimensions
Weight
Model A B C D E F G H J×X L
(g)
H43 0 to 30000 70H7+0.030
r/min BKO-C1730H41 105 90 28 19 M6×1.0 5 90 70×79 1 1024±4
–0
60H7+0.030
BKO-C1730H42 94 79 25 17 M5×0.8 5 79 60×68 1 768±4
–0
50H7+0.025
BKO-C1730H43 78 66 23 15 M5×0.8 5 66 50×57 1 478±4
–0
40H7+0.025
BKO-C1730H44 66 54 20 13 M4×0.7 5 54 40×45 1 322±4
–0
Cautions on installation of H41 to H44

Reference notch 1. Tolerance to shaft dimension should be "h6" on the
0 to 30000 Spindle
part for installing a magnet.
H44
r/min G hole
Case 2. 2-øG hole can be used for positioning of spindle and
magnet.
3. Magnet shall be installed as shown to the left.
h6 Cover 4. Misalignment between sensor head and magnetic
Gap Spindle damping screw center line shall be within ±2mm.
5. There is an NS indication on the side of the cover.
Install so that the reference notch on the sensor
Installation of magnet head comes to the case side.
4 - 17
4-2-2 Spindle end detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8)
When a spindle end and motor are connected with a V-belt, or connected with a gear ratio other than 1:1,
use this spindle end detector to detect the position and speed of the spindle end. Also use this detector
when orientation control and synchronous tap control, etc are executed under the above conditions.
(2) Specifications
Detector type OSE-1024-3-15-68 OSE-1024-3-15-68-8
-4 2 -4 2
Mechanical Inertia 0.1 × 10 kgm or less 0.1 × 10 kgm or less
characteristics Shaft friction torque 0.98Nm or less 0.98Nm or less
for rotation 4 2 4 2
Shaft angle acceleration 10 rad/s or less 10 rad/s or less
Tolerable continuous rotation speed 6000 r/min 8000 r/min
Maximum rotation speed 7030 r/min 8030 r/min
Mechanical Bearing maximum non-lubrication
20000h/6000r/min 20000h/8000r/min
configuration time
Shaft amplitude
0.02mm or less 0.02mm or less
(position 15mm from end)
Tolerable load 10kg/20kg 10kg/20kg
(thrust direction/radial direction) Half of value during operation Half of value during operation
Weight 1.5kg 1.5kg
Squareness of flange to shaft 0.05mm or less
Flange matching eccentricity 0.05mm or less
Working Ambient temperature range –5°C to +55°C
environment Storage temperature range –20°C to +85°C
Humidity 95%Ph
Vibration resistance 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30min.
2
Impact resistance 294.20m/s (30G)
(2) Detection signals

Signal name Number of detection pulses
A, B phase 1024p/rev
Z phase 1p/rev

Pin Function Pin Function
A A phase K 0V
B Z phase L -
C B phase M -
D - N A phase
E Case earth P Z phase
F - R B phase
G - S -
H +5V T -
J -
4 - 18
102 33 68
56
Ø68
Ø50
MS3102A20-29P 4- Ø5.4 hole
3 2
-0.11
0
-0.006
Ø15 -0.017
+0.012
Ø14.3
2 5 0
-0.009
Ø50 -0.025
Ø16
+0.05
0 3
+0.14
1.15 0
20
Shaft section
Key way magnified figure [Unit: mm]
Spindle end detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8)
4 - 19
4-2-3 C-axis detector (OSE90K)
This is a high-resolution spindle end detector for contouring control (C-axis control). This detector has
not only a 90,000p/rev signal used for C-axis control but also 1024p/rev signal used for orientation
control and spindle speed detection.
(1) Specifications
Detector type OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01
-4 2
Mechanical Inertia 0.1 × 10 kgm or less
characteristics for Shaft friction torque 0.98Nm or less
rotation 5 2
Shaft angle acceleration 10 rad/s or less
Continuous tolerable rotation speed 6000r/min
Maximum rotation speed 7030r/min
Mechanical Bearing maximum non-lubrication
20000hr/6000r/min
configuration time
Shaft amplitude
0.02mm or less
(position 15mm from end)
Tolerable load
10kg/20kg Half of value during operation
(thrust direction/radial direction)
Weight 2.0kg
Squareness of flange to shaft 0.05mm or less
Flange matching eccentricity 0.05mm or less
Working Working temperature range –5°C to +55°C
environment Storage temperature range –20°C to +85°C
Humidity range 95%Ph
Vibration resistance 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for
30 min.
2
Impact resistance 294.20m/s (30G)

Z phase 1p/rev
C,D phase 90,000p/rev
Y phase 1p/rev

Pin Function Pin Function
A A phase K 0V
B Z phase L C phase
C B phase M D phase
D － N A phase
E Case earth P Z phase
F C phase R B phase
G D phase S Y phase
H +5V T Y phase
J 0V
4 - 20
4-M4 depth 6 38 109

Ø62±0.2
Ø88.5
Ø84
Ø90
80
MS3102A20-29P
2 8 6.4
Ø14.3 -0.11
-0.006
Ø15 -0.017
-0.012
5 -0.042
2
-0.009
Ø50 -0.025
Ø16
3 +0.1
0
1.15 +0.14
0
20
1.15 +0.14
0
Shaft section
[Unit: mm]
Key way magnified figure
Spindle C-axis detector (OSE90K＋1024)
(Note 1) The max. detector speed must be 6000r/min or less.

(Note 2) The dimensional tolerance that is not specified is ±0.5mm.
4 - 21
4-2-4 C-axis detector (MBE90K)
not only a 90,000p/rev or 1024p/rev oblong wave signal but also a SIN wave output that is equivalent to
PLG. So, this detector can be also used for built-in motors.
(1) Specifications
Detector type MBE90K-01A MBE90K-02A MBE90K-03A MBE90K-04A MBE90K-05A
Inner diameter of detector gear ø 80mm ø 110mm ø 140mm ø 70mm ø 95mm
SIN wave output 256 w/rev 1024 w/rev 512 w/rev 256 w/rev 1024 w/rev
C/D phase electrically tolerable
100r/min
rotation speed
Operating temperature range 0°C to +70°C
Storage temperature range -20°C to +110°C (Sensor section: +120°C, 12Hr)
Humidity 5 to 95%Rh
Vibration resistance 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm (0.5Hr for each shaft), continuous 1G
2
Impact resistance 294m/s (30G), 11ms (10 times for each shaft)

Z phase 1p/rev
Y phase 1p/rev
E,F phase 256/512/1024wave/rev
X phase 1p/rev
(3) Detail specifications

For other detail specifications, refer to "C-Axis Position Detector MBE90K SPECIFICATION AND
INSTRUCTION MANUAL" (BNP-A2993-41).
4 - 22
4-2-5 C-axis detector (MHE90K)
not only oblong wave signals with 90,000p/rev and 1024p/rev but also a SIN wave signal output that is
equivalent to PLG. So, this detector can be also used for built-in motors. This detector has a ring-type
sensor, which eliminates the gap adjustment process.
(1) Specifications
Detector type MHE90K-01A MHE90K-02A MHE90K-03A MHE90K-04A MHE90K-05A
Inner diameter of detector ø 80mm ø 110mm ø 140mm ø 70mm ø 95mm
Mechanical maximum
6000r/min 4000r/min 3000r/min 6000r/min 4000r/min
rotation speed
SIN wave signal output 180 w/rev
Operating temperature range 0°C to +70°C (A/D converter and pre-amp section: 0°C to +55°C)
Storage temperature range -20°C to +85°C
Humidity 5 to 95%Rh (with no dew condensation)
Vibration resistance 10 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm (2Hr for each shaft), continuous 1G
2
Impact resistance 294m/s (30G), 11ms (10 times for each shaft)

A,B phase 1024p/rev
Z phase 1p/rev
Y phase 1p/rev
E,F phase 180wave/rev
X phase 1p/rev
(3) Detail specifications

For other detail specifications, refer to "C-Axis Position Detector MHE90K SPECIFICATION AND
INSTRUCTION MANUAL" (BNP-A2993-44).
4 - 23
4-2-6 Spindle end PLG (MXE128/180/256/512)
A detector equivalent to the spindle motor end detector can be installed on the spindle end. Note,
however, that a detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX) will be required outside the drive unit.
Consequently, the type of spindle drive unit will be changed to MDS-C1-SPX/SPHX series.
(1) Environmental conditions

Sensor section: -10°C to +80°C (With no freezing)

Ambient temperature
PCB section : -10°C to +75°C (With no freezing)
Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight)
Atmosphere With no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, dust or conductive fine
particles
(2) Specifications
The detector is configured of the encoder section (combination of sensor section and PCB section)
and the detection gear section. Six types of combinations with different output signals and mounting
dimensions are available. The user is responsible for assembly and adjustment of the detector.
Detector gears Detector

Length of lead Reference speed
No. of AB Outer Inner between sensor at signal
Type Z phase
phase pulses diameter diameter and confirmation
(mm) (mm) intermediate (r/min)
connector (mm)
MXE128-G40-04 400
128 Provided ø 52 ø 40 3600
MXE128-G40-08 800
MXE180-G55-04 400
180 Provided ø 72.8 ø 55 2560
MXE180-G55-08 800
MXE256-G80-04 400
256 Provided ø 103.2 ø 80 1800
MXE256-G80-08 800
MXE512-G140-04 400
512 Provided ø 205.6 ø 140 900
MXE512-G140-08 800
MXE180R-G55-04 400
180 Provided ø 72.8 ø 55 2560
MXE180R-G55-08 800
MXE256R-G80-04 400
256 Provided ø 103.2 ø 80 1800
MXE256R-G80-08 800
<Reference> The conventional part's type

Encoder section : TS1860N2*** has been changed to TS1860N1***.
Gear section : TS1450N2*** has been changed to TS1450N***.
Precautions
1. The length of the standard lead wire connected between the sensor and intermediate connector is
400mm. An 800mm type is available as an option. To prevent the adverse effect of noise, install the
PCB section as close to the sensor section, and keep the length of the lead wire between the
sensor and PCB as short as possible. Separate this wire from the power wire when possible.
2. Mount the detector gears on the same axis as the final axis.
3. Mount the PCB section where it will not be subject to water or cutting oil, etc. (For example, install a
box, etc., design so that oil and water, etc., cannot enter even from the wiring ports, and then install
the PCB in that box.)
In consideration of adjustments and maintenance, use a structure that enables adjustments and
replacements.
4. Provide a structure that does not allow foreign matter (iron chips, etc.) enter into the sensor detector
surface or detection gear teeth.
4 - 24

Fig. 1 MXE128-G40-
40 2- 5.8
29
Bonding at shaded section

Gap 0.15±0.01
5.5
85 200±10 27.4
70
Serial No.
indication
23
7
40
45.5
R35.5
Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1
PCB 2- 5.8 Pin #350690-1
Accessories
Intermediate connector
Detection Plug #350720-1 1 pc.
gear Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.
Shield treatment
PCB protection cover
[Unit: mm]
Type Detector part type Detector gear part type

MXE128-G40-04 TS1860N2275
MU1450N2137
MXE128-G40-08 TS1860N2276
Fig. 2 MXE180-G55-
40
29 2- 5.8

Gap 0.15±0.01
5.5
85 200±10 27.4
70 Serial No.
indication
23
7
40
56
R45
2- 5.8 Output connector (AMP)

PCB Cap #350782-1
Pin #350690-1
2- 4.1
Intermediate connector Accessories
Plug #350720-1 1 pc.
Detection gear Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.
Shield treatment
64
[Unit: mm]

MXE180-G55-04 TS1860N2777
MU1450N2730
MXE180-G55-08 TS1860N2775
4 - 25
Fig. 3 MXE256-G80-
40 2- 5.8
29
Gap 0.15±0.01
5.5
85 200±10 27.4
70 Serial No. indication
23
7
40
71
R61 Output connector (AMP)

2- 5.8 Cap #350782-1
PCB
Pin #350690-1
Intermediate connector Accessories
Plug #350720-1 1 pc.
Shield treatment Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.
2-M5×0.8 screw
90 Detection gear
[Unit: mm]

MXE256-G80-04 TS1860N2171
MU1450N2236
MXE256-G80-08 TS1860N2174
Fig. 4 MXE512-G140-
40 2- 5.8
29
Gap 0.15±0.01
5.5
23

85 200±10 27.4
70
Serial No. indication
R112.5
7
40
122.5
2- 5.8 Output connector (AMP)

PCB
Cap #350782-1
Pin #350690-1
Intermediate connector
Accessories
Shield treatment Plug #350720-1 1 pc.
PCB protection cover Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.
2-M8 screw
180 Detection gear
[Unit: mm]

MXE512-G140-04 TS1860N2571
MU1450N2534
MXE512-G140-08 TS1860N2572
4 - 26
Fig. 5 MXE180R-G55-
62
40
（Gap 0.15）
60°
12
85 200±10 27.4
70 Serial No. indication
38.5
7
40
104
Detection PCB 2- 5.8

gear
Intermediate connector Output connector (AMP)
Installation plate Shield treatment Cap #350782-1
120° Pin #350690-1
3- 6.6 Accessories
Plug #350720-1 1 pc.
Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.
[Unit: mm]

MXE180R-G55-04 TS1860N2770
MU1450N2730
MXE180R-G55-08 TS1860N2776
Fig. 6 MXE256R-G80-
Sensor installation seat
40
60°
23
85 200±10 27.4
76.5
Serial No. indication

70
53.5
136
7
40
90
2-M5×0.8 screw 2- 5.8

PCB Output connector (AMP)
Cap #350782-1
120° Detection gear Intermediate connector Pin #350690-1
Shield treatment Accessories
Plug #350720-1 1 pc.
Installation plate PCB protection cover Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.
3- 6.6
[Unit: mm]

MXE256R-G80-04 TS1860N2183
MU1450N2236
MXE256R-G80-08 TS1860N2187
4 - 27
4-2-7 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX)
When a spindle end PLG is used for detecting the position and speed on the spindle end, a detector
conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX) is required. At the same time, use MDS-C1-SPX/SPHX series for a
spindle drive unit.
(1) Specifications
Type MDS-B-PJEX
Compatible spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SPX / MDS-C1-SPHX
Compatible detector MXE128/180/256/512-G-
Analog signal input specifications A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase
(CN5) Same as motor end PLG detector specifications
Compatible frequency Analog raw waveform max. 150kHz
Scale resolution Analog raw waveform/2048 division
2
Tolerable vibration 98.0m/s (10G)
2
Tolerable impact 294.0m/s (30G)
Protective structure Protective type (protection method: IP20)
(Note 1) The power for the MDS-B-PJEX (24VDC stabilized power 15W) must be prepared by the
user.
(Note 2) If a spindle motor whose maximum rotation speed is 10,000r/min or more is driven, use
MDS-C1-SPHX series.
4 - 28

• MDS-B-PJEX
Heat dissipation
allowance
100
40 135
CN5 CN6
CN7 CN8
168
CN2A CN3A
CN9
Heat dissipation and wiring

6
6
70
allowance
Wiring
150
allowance
156
2-M5-0.8 screw CR30
+24V power input

34 6
Unit: [mm]
Mounting hole
4 - 29
4-3 Cables and connectors

4-3-1 Cable connection diagram
The cables and connectors that can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp. as option parts are shown
below. Cables can only be ordered in the designated lengths shown on the following pages. Purchase a
connector set, etc., to create special length cables.
Servo drive unit Spindle drive unit Power supply unit Battery unit
(MDS-C1-V1/2) (MDS-C1-SP) (MDS-C1-CV) (MDS-A-BT)
Terminator
(A-TM)
From NC
(1) (1) NC bus cable (1)
(3) Brake connector (1)

CN2 CN5
CN6
Detector conversion unit
CN3 CN7 (MDS-B-PJEX)
(5) Spindle detector

cable
<MDS-B-PJEX unit
cable>
Spindle motor
(5) Spindle detector cable Spindle end detector/magnetic sensor

<Spindle end detector/magnetic sensor cable>
C-axis detector
(5) Spindle detector cable

<C-axis detector cable>

(Note) The linear scale must
<Motor end PLG / Spindle end PLG cable> be prepared by the user.
Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD) Linear scale
(2) Servo detector cable Linear scale cable

<MDS-B-SD unit cable> (This cable must be
prepared by the
Detector conversion unit user.)
(MDS-B-HR)
(2) Servo detector cable Linear scale cable

for MDS-B-HR
<MDS-B-HR unit cable>
(This cable must be prepared by
the user.)
(4) Power
connector
(2) Servo detector cable
Ball screw end detector
<Ball screw end detector cable>
(3) Brake connector

Servomotor
<Servo motor side detector cable>
4 - 30
4-3-2 List of cables and connectors
(1) NC bus cable and connector

Item Model Contents
For NC bus cable SH21 Drive unit side connector Drive unit side connector
CN1A (3M) (3M)
CN1B Length: Connector : 10120-6000EL Connector : 10120-6000EL
0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1, Shell kit : 10320-3210-000 Shell kit : 10320-3210-000
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,
3.5, 4, 4.5, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 15, 20, 30 m
For NC bus cable connector set FCUA-CS000 Drive unit side connector Drive unit side connector
CN1A (3M) (3M)
CN1B Connector : 10120-3000VE Connector : 10120-3000VE
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.
4 - 31
(2) Servo detector cable and connector

Item Model Contents
For CN2 Motor side detector cable CNV12- - - Servo drive unit side connector Servomotor detector side/
(3M) Ball screw end detector side
connector (DDK)
Drive unit side connector
Blank : One-touch lock • Detector connector straight
S : Screw lock specification
Environment Connector : 10120-3000VE For general environment
Blank : (One-touch type lock) Straight plug : MS3106B22-14S
For general environment
P : IP65 compatible
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Clamp : MS3057-12A
(Screw-type lock)
Detector side connector
2: Straight cannon
Shell kit : 10320-52A0-008 IP65 compatible
3: Angle cannon Plug :
MS3106A22-14S(D190)
Axis No.
0: Not indicated Straight back shell:
1: No. 1 axis CE02-22BS-S
to
4: No. 4 axis Clamp : CE3057-12A-3
Length:
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,• Detector connector angle

3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, specification
6, 7, 8, 9, Connector : 10120-3000VE For general environment
10, 11, 12, 13, (One-touch type lock) Angle plug : MS3108B22-14S
14, 15, 17, 20 m Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Clamp : MS3057-12A
For CN3 Ball screw end detector cable CNV13- - - (Screw-type lock)
Shell kit : 10320-52A0-008 IP65 compatible
Plug :
Drive unit side connector
Blank : One-touch lock MS3106A22-14S(D190)
S : Screw lock Angle back shell:
Environment CE02-22BA-S
Blank : Clamp : CE3057-12A-3
For general environment
P : IP65 compatible
Detector side connector

2: Straight cannon
3: Angle cannon
Axis No.
0: Not indicated
1: No. 1 axis
to
4: No. 4 axis
Length:
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,
3.5, 4, 4.5, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 17, 20 m
4 - 32
Item Model Contents

For MDS-B-HR unit cable CNL3 - - Servo drive unit side MDS-B-HR unit side connector
connector (Hirose Electric)
MDS-B-
(3M)
HR unit Drive unit side connector
Blank: One-touch lock Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : RM15WTP-8S
S : Screw lock (One-touch type lock) Clamp : RM15WTP-CP(10)
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
HR unit connector (Screw-type lock)
H1:CON1
H2:CON2 Shell kit : 10320-52A0-008
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
For MDS-B-SD unit cable SH21 Servo drive unit side connector MDS-B-SD unit side connector
MDS-B- (3M) (3M)
SD unit Length: Connector : 10120-6000EL Connector : 10120-6000EL
0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1, Shell kit : 10320-3210-000 Shell kit : 10320-3210-000
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,
3.5, 4, 4.5, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 15, 20, 30 m
MDS-B-SD unit connector set FCUA-CS000 Servo drive unit side MDS-B-SD unit side connector
connector (3M)
(3M) Connector : 10120-3000VE
Connector : 10120-3000VE Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
4 - 33
Item Model Contents

For CN2 Detector connector set IP67 Straight ENCP22-14S3 Servo drive unit side connector Servomotor detector side
for compati- (3M) connector (DDK)
HC -A42/E42, ble Compliant cable range Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : MS3106A22-14S(D190)
HC -A51/E51, ø6.8 to ø10 Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Straight back shell:
HA -A42/E42, CE02-22BS-S
HA -A51/E51 Clamp : CE3057-12A-3
Angle ENCP22-14L3 Servo drive unit side connector Servomotor detector side
(3M) connector (DDK)
Compliant cable range Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : MS3106A22-14S(D190)
ø6.8 to ø10 Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Angle back shell: CE-22BA-S
Clamp : CE3057-12A-3
For Straight FCUA-CS080 Servo drive unit side connector Servomotor detector side
general (3M) connector (DDK)
environ- Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : MS3106B22-14S
ment Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Clamp : MS3057-12A
Angle FCUA-CS084 Servo drive unit side connector Servomotor detector side
(3M) connector (DDK)
Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : MS3108B22-14S
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Clamp : MS3057-12A
4 - 34
(3) Brake connector

Item Model Contents
For Brake connector for IP67 Straight BRKP10SL-4S Servomotor side brake connector
compati-
motor HC202B,HC352B, Plug : MS3106A10SL-4S(D190)
ble
brake HC452B,HC702B Compliant cable range (DDK)
HC902B ø5 to ø8.3 Clamp : YSO10-5-8
HC203B,HC353B (Daiwa Dengyo)
HC453B,HC703B
HA053NB,HA13NB
HA23NB,HA33NB
Angle BRKP10SL-4L Servomotor side brake connector
Plug : MS3106A10SL-4S(D190)
Compliant cable range (DDK)
ø5 to ø8.3 Clamp : YLO10-5-8
(Daiwa Dengyo)
For Straight FCUA-CN804 Servomotor side brake connector

general
(Japan Aviation Electronics)
environ-
ment Plug : MS3106B10SL-4S
Clamp : MS3057-4A
Angle FCUA-CN808 Servomotor side brake connector

(Japan Aviation Electronics)
Plug : MS3108B10SL-4S
Clamp : MS3057-4A
For Connector for motor brake control output CNU20S(AWG14) Servo drive unit side connector
CN20 (DDK)
Connector : DK-3200S-03R
Contact : DK-3REC2LLP1-100
4 - 35
(4) Power connector

Item Model Contents
For Power connector for IP67 and Straight PWCE18-12S Servomotor side power
motor
HA053N,HA13N, EN connector (DDK)
power
HA23N,HA33N compati- Compliant cable range Plug : CE05-6A18-12SD-B-BSS
ble ø8.5 to ø11 Clamp : CE3057-10A-2(D265)
Angle PWCE18-12L Servomotor side power

connector (DDK)
Compliant cable range Plug : CE05-8A18-12SD-B-BAS
ø8.5 to ø11 Clamp : CE3057-10A-2(D265)
For Straight FCUA-CN801 Servomotor side power

general connector (DDK)
environ- Plug : MS3106B18-12S
ment Clamp : MS3057-10A
Angle FCUA-CN805 Servomotor side power

connector (DDK)
Plug : MS3108B18-12S
Clamp : MS3057-10A
Power connector for IP67 and Straight PWCE22-23S Servomotor side power
HC52 to 152, EN connector (DDK)
HC53 to 153, compati- Compliant cable range Plug : CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS
HC103R to 203R ble ø9.5 to ø13 Clamp : CE3057-12A-2(D265)

connector (DDK)
ø9.5 to ø13 Clamp : CE3057-12A-2(D265)


connector (DDK)
Clamp : MS3057-12A
4 - 36
Item Model Contents

For Power connector for IP67 and Straight PWCE24-10S Servomotor side power
motor HC202,HC352,HC452 EN connector (DDK)
power HC203,HC353 compati- Compliant cable range Plug : CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS
HC353R,HC503R ble ø13 to ø15.5 Clamp : CE3057-16A-2(D265)

connector (DDK)
ø13 to ø15.5 Clamp : CE3057-16A-2(D265)


connector (DDK)
Clamp : MS3057-16A
Power connector for IP67 and Straight PWCE32-17S Servomotor side power
HC702,HC902 EN connector (DDK)
HC453,HC703 compati- Compliant cable range Plug : CE05-6A32-17SD-B-BSS
ble ø22 to ø23.8 Clamp : CE3057-20A-1(D265)

connector (DDK)
ø22 to ø23.8 Clamp : CE3057-20A-1(D265)


connector (DDK)
Clamp : MS3057-20A
4 - 37

Item Model Contents
For CN5 Motor end PLG cable/Spindle end PLG cable CNP5- - Spindle drive unit side Spindle motor side connector
connector (3M) For 2-type
(Tyco Electronics AMP)
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : 350720-1
2: Connector
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Pin : 350689-1
E: Crimped terminal
For E-type (J.S.T.)

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)
Crimped terminal: V1.25-4
1: No. 1 axis
to
8: No. 8 axis
2-type
System No.
None: 1st system
2 : 2nd system E-type
P : PLC axis
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
For CN6 Magnetic sensor cable CNP6M- - Spindle drive unit side Magnetic sensor side
connector (3M) connector
For 2-type (Tajimi Musen)
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug: TRC116-12A10-7F10.5
2: Connector Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
E: Crimped terminal
For E-type (J.S.T.)
1: No. 1 axis
2-type
to
8: No. 8 axis
System No. E-type

None: 1st system
2 : 2nd system
P : PLC axis
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
Spindle end detector cable CNP6A - - Spindle drive unit side Spindle end detector side
connector (3M) connector
For 2-type (DDK)
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Plug : MS3106A20-29S
2: Straight cannon Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Clamp : MS3057-12A
3: Angle cannon
E: Crimped terminal
For 3-type (DDK)
Axis No. (1 to 8 axis) Plug : MS3108A20-29S
1: No. 1 axis
to Clamp : MS3057-12A
8: No. 8 axis
For E-type (J.S.T.)
System No.
None: 1st system Crimped terminal: V1.25-4
2 : 2nd system
P : PLC axis 2-type
3-type
E-type
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
4 - 38
Item Model Contents

For CN7 C-axis detector (OSE90K) cable CNP7A - - Spindle drive unit side C-axis detector side connector
connector (3M) For 2-type (DDK)
Plug : MS3106A20-29S
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Clamp : MS3057-12A
2: Straight cannon Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
3: Angle cannon
For 3-type (DDK)
E: Crimped terminal
Axis No. (1 to 8 axis) Clamp : MS3057-12A
1: No. 1 axis
to
8: No. 8 axis For E-type (J.S.T.)
System No.
None: 1st system
2-type
2 : 2nd system
P : PLC axis
3-type
E-type
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
C-axis detector (MBE90K) cable CNP7B - - Spindle drive unit side C-axis detector side connector
connector (3M) For 2-type (Du pont)
Housing : 69176-020
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Pin : 48235-000
2: Connector
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
E: Crimped terminal
For E-type (J.S.T.)
1: No. 1 axis
to 2-type
8: No. 8 axis
System No. E-type

None: 1st system
2 : 2nd system
P : PLC axis
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
C-axis detector (MHE90K) cable CNP7H - - Spindle drive unit side C-axis detector side connector
connector (3M) For 2-type(DDK)
Housing : JAC-15P
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Pin : J-SP1140
2: Connector
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
E: Crimped terminal
For E-type (J.S.T.)
1: No. 1 axis
to 2-type
8: No. 8 axis
System No. E-type

None: 1st system
2 : 2nd system
P : PLC axis
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
4 - 39
Item Model Contents

For CN6 C-axis detector (OSE90K with 1024p output) CNP67A - - Spindle drive unit side C-axis detector side connector
CN7 cable connector (3M) For 2-type (DDK)
Connector type Connector : 10120-3000VE Clamp : MS3057-12A
2: Straight cannon
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
3: Angle cannon
For 3-type (DDK)
E: Crimped terminal
1: No. 1 axis Clamp : MS3057-12A
to
8: No. 8 axis
For E-type (J.S.T.)
System No.
None: 1st system
2 : 2nd system 2-type
P : PLC axis
3-type
E-type
Length:
2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m
For MDS-B-PJEX unit cable SH21 Spindle drive unit side MDS-B-PJEX unit side
MDS-B- connector (3M) connector (3M)
PJEX Length: Connector : 10120-6000EL Connector : 10120-6000EL
unit 0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1, Shell kit : 10320-3210-000 Shell kit : 10320-3210-000
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,
3.5, 4, 4.5, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 15, 20, 30 m
MDS-B-PJEX unit connector set FCUA-CS000 Spindle drive unit side MDS-B-PJEX unit side
connector (3M) connector (3M)
Connector : 10120-3000VE Connector : 10120-3000VE
Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008 Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008
MDS-B-PJEX unit power cable FCUA-R220 MDS-B-PJEX unit side DC24V(+) power side
connector (Japan AMP) connector (J.S.T.)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Crimped terminal: V1.25-3
Contact : 1-175218-5
Length:
1, 2, 3, 5,
7, 10, 15, 17 m
MDS-B-PJEX unit power connector set FCUA-CN220 MDS-B-PJEX unit side
connector (Japan AMP)
Connector : 2-178288-3
Contact : 1-175218-5
4 - 40
5-1 Selecting the wire size ....................................................................................................................... 5-2

5-2 Selection the AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker.................................................................. 5-5
5-2-1 Standard selection....................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-2-2 Selection when a contactor is shared ......................................................................................... 5-6
5-3 Circuit protector .................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5-4 Circuit protector .................................................................................................................................. 5-8
5-5 Noise filter .......................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-6 Surge absorber................................................................................................................................. 5-10
5-7 Speedometer and load meter........................................................................................................... 5-11
5-8 Cable for peripheral control.............................................................................................................. 5-12
5-8-1 Cable for external emergency stop ........................................................................................... 5-12
5-8-2 Cable for servomotor magnetic brake ....................................................................................... 5-13
5-1
5-1 Selecting the wire size

(1) Recommended wire size for power lead-in
Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size using the power supply unit capacity as a
reference, as shown below.
Recommended wire size for power lead-in Wire size for L+ Wire size for
Power supply unit type (Note 1) and L– link bar L11 and L12 link
IV wire (60°C) HV wire (75°C) (Note 2) bar
MDS-C1-CV-37 HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ
MDS-C1-CV-55 HIV3.5SQ
MDS-C1-CV-75 IV5.5SQ HIV5.5SQ IV5.5SQ IV2SQ or larger
MDS-C1-CV-110 IV14SQ (Note)
HIV14SQ IV14SQ
MDS-C1-CV-150 IV22SQ Use IV2SQ or
MDS-C1-CV-185 IV30SQ HIV22SQ larger for the wire
IV22SQ
MDS-C1-CV-220 IV38SQ HIV30SQ between NFB
MDS-C1-CV-260 IV50SQ IV38SQ and L11, L21.
HIV38SQ
MDS-C1-CV-300 IV60SQ
IV60SQ
MDS-C1-CV-370 - HIV50SQ
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire

Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size using the spindle drive unit capacity as a
reference, as shown below.
Recommended wire size for spindle motor

Spindle drive unit type output wire (Note 1) Wire size for L11 and L21 link bar
IV wire (60°C) HV wire (75°C)
MDS-C1-SP-04
IV2SQ
MDS-C1-SP-075
MDS-C1-SP-15
HIV2SQ
MDS-C1-SP-22
IV3.5SQ
MDS-C1-SP-37
IV2SQ or larger
MDS-C1-SP-55
(Note)
MDS-C1-SP-75 IV5.5SQ HIV35SQ
Use IV2SQ or larger for the wire
MDS-C1-SP-110 IV8SQ HIV5.5SQ
between NFB and L11, L21.
MDS-C1-SP-150(S) IV14SQ
HIV14SQ
MDS-C1-SP-185 IV22SQ
MDS-C1-SP-220 IV30SQ HIV22SQ
5-2
(3) Recommended wire size for servomotor output wire

Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size using the servo drive unit capacity as a reference,
as shown below.
If a 2-axis drive unit (MDS-C1-V2) is used, select the size according to the capacity of each axis.
Recommended wire size for servomotor

Servo drive unit type output wire (Note 1) Wire size for L11 and L21 link bar
IV wire (60°C) HIV wire (75°C)
MDS-C1-V1-01
IV1.25SQ HIV1.25SQ
MDS-C1-V1-03
MDS-C1-V1-05
IV2SQ
MDS-C1-V1-10 HIV2SQ
IV2SQ or larger
MDS-C1-V1-20 IV3.5SQ
(Note)
MDS-C1-V1-35
IV5.5SQ HIV3.5SQ Use IV2SQ or larger for the wire
MDS-C1-V1-45(S)
between NFB and L11, L21.
MDS-C1-V1-70(S) HIV5.5SQ
IV8SQ
MDS-C1-V1-90 HIV8SQ
MDS-C1-V1-110 IV14SQ HIV14SQ
MDS-C1-V1-150 IV30SQ HIV22SQ
(Note 1) The wire sizes recommended in (1) to (3) above are V1 V2 SP CV

selected with conditions of an ambient temperature of
30°C and three wires in the same condition.
During actual use, select the wire based on the above
reference while considering the ambient temperature,
wire material, and wiring state.
(Note 2) To use the minimum required wire size for the L+ and L–
link bar for each unit, calculate the total output current of
loading motors according to the steps below and select
the wire size.
First, obtain the motor output current for each drive unit,
using the drive unit capacity for the spindle, and the motor
capacity for the servomotor.
Load current of L+ and L– link
5-3
(a) Spindle motor (Select the following values according to the spindle drive unit capacity.)
Unit capacity
04 075 15 22 37 55 75
MDS-C1-SP-
Motor output current (A) 4 6 10 17 25 30 40
Unit capacity
110 150 150S 185 220 260 300
MDS-C1-SP-
Motor output current (A) 60 74 94 103 127 165
(b) Servomotor (Select the following values according to the motor capacity.)
Servomotor type HC52 HC102 HC152 HC202 HC352 HC452 HC702 HC902
Motor output current (A) 3.94 7.4 11.1 15.4 22.9 40.4 46.2 55.9
Servomotor type HC53 HC103 HC153 HC203 HC353 HC453 HC703

Motor output current (A) 5.8 9.8 15.9 22.4 33.3 57.3 69.2
Servomotor type HC103R HC153R HC203R HC353R HC503R

Motor output current (A) 6.1 8.8 14.0 22.5 28.0
HA- HA-
Servomotor type HA053N HA13N HA23N HA33N
LF11K2 LF15K2
Motor output current (A) 1.4 1.4 3.0 3.0 84.7 98.6
Calculate a load current flowing through L+ and L- link for each unit, using the expression below.
Select the wire so that its load current is equal to or less than the tolerable current indicated in the
table below.
Load current flowing through L+ and L- link = (Total output current of loaded motors) x 1.1
Selection of wire size
Tolerable current (A)

Wire size
IV wire (60°C) HIV wire (75°C)
2SQ 27 33
3.5SQ 37 45
5.5SQ 49 60
8SQ 61 74
14SQ 88 107
22SQ 115 140
38SQ 162 198
60SQ 217 265
(Ambient temperature 30°C or less)
5-4
5-2 Selection the AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker
5-2-1 Standard selection
Install an AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker (NFB) per one power supply unit. Refer to the table
below and select them according to each power supply unit capacity.
Selection of AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker (NFB)
Power supply unit

3.7 to 7.5kW 11kW 15 to 18.5kW 22 to 30kW 37kW
capacity
AC reactor B-AL-7.5K B-AL-11K B-AL-18.5K B-AL-30K B-AL-37K
Recommended
contactor S-N25 200V S-N35 200V S-N50 200V S-N80 200V S-N150 200V
(Special order part)
Recommended
NF50CS3P-40A0
main circuit NFB NF50CS3P-50A05 NF100CS3P-100A05 NF225CS3P-150A05 NF225CS3P-175A05
5
An NFB or CP (circuit protector) can be used as the motor fan breaker.
Select the NFB or CP using a value approximately double the motor fan rated current value shown below.
Contact the NFB or CP manufacturer for details on the recommended wire size, etc.
Recommended
Spindle motor Servomotor
motor fan NFB 71 90 112 132 160 180 HA-LF11K2 HA-LF15K2
frame size capacity
Motor fan Motor fan
0.1A 0.2A 0.2A 0.2A 0.6A 0.6A 0.3A 0.3A
rated current rated current
* A rush current that is approximately double the above rated current flows when the motor starts.
(Note 1) In the above table, a special order part refers to a part that cannot be ordered from Mitsubishi,
and which must be prepared by the user.
(Note 2) To comply with the EC Directives, use contactors and NFB that comply with the EN/IEC
Standards.
If a breaker is shared by several power supply units, the breaker may not
CAUTION activate when a short-circuit fault occurs in a small capacity unit. This is
dangerous, so never share the breakers.
5-5
5-2-2 Selection when a contactor is shared
If two or more power supply units share one contactor, select the contactor as explained below. Note,
however, that one AC reactor and no-fuse breaker are required per one power supply unit.
(1) Selection
Calculate the total input current of the power supply units that share one contactor by referring to
the following table. Select the contactor whose capacity is equal to or less than the rated
conductivity current.
Power supply unit input current
Power supply unit CV-37 CV-55 CV-75 CV-110 CV-150 CV-185 CV-220 CV-260 CV-300 CV-370
Input current 20 30 40 50 70 80 100 120 135 160
(2) Connection diagram when a contactor is shared

Install one AC reactor and no-fuse breaker per each power supply unit.
NC control
section C1-V1 C1-V2 C1-CV (No. 2) C1-SP C1-CV (No. 1) A-BT
CSH21
CN1A1
CN1A
CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5) (6)
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
MC1 MC1
L+, L– L+, L–
L11, L21 L11, L21
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3

For control power
200VAC
MC
AC reactor
NFB2
200VAC
NFB1
Contactor
AC reactor
5-6
5-3 Circuit protector

When installing an earth leakage breaker, select the breaker on the following basis to prevent the
breaker from malfunctioning by the higher frequency earth leakage current generated in the servo or
spindle drive unit.
(1) Selection
Obtaining the earth leakage current for all drive units referring to the following table, select an earth
leakage breaker within the “rated non-operation sensitivity current”.
Usually use an earth leakage breaker for inverter products that function at a leakage current within
the commercial frequency range (50 to 60Hz).
If a product sensitive to higher frequencies is used, the breaker could malfunction at a level less
than the maximum earth leakage current value.
Earth leakage current for each unit
Unit Earth leakage current Maximum earth leakage current

MDS-C1-SP-04 to 300 6mA 15mA
MDS-C1-V1-01 to 150 1mA 2mA
MDS-C1-V2-0101 to 9090S 1mA 4mA (for two axes)
(Note1) Maximum earth leakage current: Value that considers wiring length and grounding, etc.
(Commercial frequency 50/60Hz)
(Note2) The earth leakage current in the power supply unit side is included in the drive unit side.
(2) Measurement of earth leakage current

When actually measuring the earth leakage current, use a product that is not easily affected by the
higher frequency earth leakage current. The measurement range should be 50 to 60Hz.
1. The earth leakage current tends to increase as the motor capacity increases.
2. A higher frequency earth leakage current will always be generated because the
inverter circuit in the drive unit switches the transistor at high speed. Always
ground to reduce the higher frequency earth leakage current as much as
POINT possible.
3. An earth leakage current containing higher frequency may reach approx.
several hundreds of mA. According to IEC479-2, this level is not hazardous to
the human body.
5-7
5-4 Circuit protector

This breaker is used to switch the control power and to provide overload and short-circuit protection.
When connecting a circuit protector or breaker to the power input (TE3 terminals L11 and L21) for the
control circuit, use a product that does not trip (incorrectly activate) by a rush current when the power is
turned ON. A circuit protector with inertial delay and an operation delayed type breaker are available to
prevent unnecessary tripping. Select the product to be used according to the machine specifications.
The rush current and rush conductivity time differ according to the power impedance and power ON
timing, so select a product that does not trip even under the conditions listed in the following table.
I [A]
Rush conductivity time:
Rush current: Ip Time to reach 36.8% of rush current; equivalent to breaker
operation characteristics operation time.
36.8%
t [ms]
Time
constant: T
Rush current and rush conductive time for each unit
Rush current Rush conductive time

Unit type
Ip [A] T [ms]
MDS-C1-CV-370 or less, MDS-C1-V1/V2/SP 30 to 35 3 to 6
When collectively protecting the control circuit power for multiple units, select a
POINT circuit protector or breaker that satisfies the total sum of the rush current Ip.
The largest value is used for the rush conductivity time T.
5-8
5-5 Noise filter

(1) Selection
Use an EMC noise filter if the noise conducted to the power line must be reduced. Select an EMC
noise filter taking the power supply unit's input rated voltage and input rated current into
consideration.
(2) Noise filter mounting position

Install the noise filter to the power supply unit’s power input as the diagram below indicates.
Power
distribution panel
Breaker Contactor AC reactor Power supply unit

R
Noise filter
Power S
supply
T
MDS-C1-CV
(Note) The noise filter must be prepared by the user.
Recommended devices: Okaya Electric Industries 3SUP-HL-ER-6B Series

Soshin Electric HF3000C-TMA Series
Contact: Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. Telephone: 03-3424-8120

(+81-3-3424-8120)
http://www.okayaelec.co.jp
Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. Telephone: 03-3775-9112
(+81-3-3775-9112)
http://www.soshin.co.jp
(Note) The above devices may be changed at the manufacturer's discretion.

Contact each manufacturer for more information.
5-9
5-6 Surge absorber

When controlling a magnetic brake of a servomotor in DC OFF circuit, a surge absorber must be
installed to protect the relay contacts and brakes. Commonly a varistor is used.
(1) Selection of varistor

When a varistor is installed in parallel with the coil, the surge voltage can be adsorbed as heat to
protect a circuit. Commonly a 120V product is applied. When the brake operation time is delayed,
use a 220V product. Always confirm the operation with an actual machine.
(2) Specifications
Select a varistor with the following or equivalent specifications. To prevent short-circuiting, attach a
flame resistant insulation tube, etc., onto the leads as shown in the following outline dimension
drawing.
Varistor specifications
Varistor Rating Electrostatic

voltage Surge current Energy Max. limit capacity
rating Tolerable
Varistor type withstand level withstand level Power voltage (reference
(range) circuit voltage value)
(A) (J)
(V) AC (V) DC (V) 1 time 2 times 10/1000us 2ms (W) (V) (pF)
ERZV10D121 120
75 100 3500 2500 20 14.5 0.4 200 1400
TNR10V121K (108 to 132)
ERZV10D221 220
140 180 3500 2500 39 27.5 0.4 360 410
TNR10V221K (198 to 242)
(Note 1) Selection condition: When ON/OFF frequency is 10 times/min or less, and exciting current is 2A or less
(Note 2) ERZV10D121 and ERZV10D221 are manufactured by Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
TNR10V121K and TNR10V221K are manufactured by MARCON Electronics Co., Ltd.
Contact: Matsushita Electronic Components Co., Ltd : http://www.panasonic.co.jp/ maco/
MARCON Electronics Co., Ltd. Telephone : (Kanto)03-3471-7041 (+81-3-3471-7041)
(Kinki) 06-6364-2381 (+81-3-6364-2381)
(Chubu) 052-581-2595 (+81-52-581-2595)
(3) Outline dimension drawing

• ERZV10D121, ERZV10D221
11.5
[Unit: mm]
Insulation tube
20.0
Normally use a product with 120V varistor voltage. If there is no allowance for the brake
POINT operation time, use the 220V product. A varistor whose voltage exceeds 220V cannot be
used, as such varistor will exceed the specifications of the relay in the unit.
5 - 10
5-7 Speedometer and load meter

Speedometer and load meter can be output from the D/A output which is for measuring control data.
(1) Speedometer output

When speedometer is output, +10V DC is output at the motor’s maximum speed regardless of the
motor’s rotation direction. The following specifications are recommended for the display.
MO1out put voltage (V)

(a) Type YM-8G type DC voltage type (Mitsubishi) 10
(b) Rating 10VDC full scale
(c) Internal impedance approx. 10kΩ
0
Maximum rotation speed
Motor rotation speed (r/min)
Speedometer output specification

(2) Load meter output
The load meter indicates the percentage of the load in respect to the motor's rated output. The
relation of the motor output capacity [kW] and load meter display [%] is as follows.
Motor output capacity (kW)
Overload (for one minute)

zone
50%ED (15-minute) Load meter 120%
(30-minute) zone Load meter 100%
Continuous rating
Load meter X 100%
30-minute rating
Continuous rating zone
0 1500 6000 8000

Motor rotation speed (r/min)
Load meter output specification
The following specifications are recommended for the display.

(a) Type YM-8G type DC voltage type (Mitsubishi)
(b) Rating 10VDC full scale
(c) Internal impedance approx. 10kΩ
(d) Scale indicating alarm at 100% or above (see right figure)
60 Red zone
40 80
20 100
0 % 120
Load meter display
5 - 11
5-8 Cable for peripheral control
5-8-1 Cable for external emergency stop
Prepare the cable below for external emergency stop function (dual emergency stop function). The
cable for external emergency stop must be prepared by the user.
External emergency
stop connector
Bottom view of MDS-C1-CV
No. Item Type Manufacturer

101 Connector 2-178288-3 Tyco Electronics AMP
102 Contact 1-175218-2 Tyco Electronics AMP
Wire size:0.5 to 1.25SQ
101 102
3 +
1 -
CN23
Drive unit side
5 - 12
5-8-2 Cable for servomotor magnetic brake
Prepare the cable according to the servo system specifications.
(1) Magnetic brake control for 9kW or less servomotor

Use CN20 connector output to control a motor magnetic brake. Refer to the section "3-1-5 Magnetic
brake" for the connection details.
1 Common
2
EMG-2 3 Motor brake
CNU20S(AWG14)
Drive unit side
Connection of CN20 connector
(2) Magnetic brake and dynamic brake control for 11kW or 15kW servomotor
Use a dynamic brake output as well as a motor magnetic brake output for using a dynamic brake
unit (MDS-B-DBU-150). Refer to the sections "3-1-5 Magnetic brake" and "4-1-2 Dynamic brake
unit" for the connection details.
1 Common
EMG-1
2 Dynamic brake
EMG-2 3 Motor brake
CNU20S(AWG14)
Drive unit side
Connection of CN20 connector when a dynamic brake unit is used
5 - 13
Appendix 1-1 Servomotor outline dimension drawings..........................................................................A1-2

Appendix 1-1-1 HC Series ..................................................................................................................A1-2
Appendix 1-1-2 HA Series ..................................................................................................................A1-8
Appendix 1-2 Outline dimension drawings of spindle motor ................................................................A1-12
Appendix 1-2-1 SJ Series .................................................................................................................A1-12
Appendix 1-2-2 SJ-V Series .............................................................................................................A1-15
Appendix 1-2-3 SJ-VS Series ...........................................................................................................A1-25
Appendix 1-2-4 SJ-PMF Series (IPM motor) ....................................................................................A1-27
Appendix 1-3 Unit outline dimension drawings ....................................................................................A1-28
Appendix 1-3-1 Servo/spindle drive unit...........................................................................................A1-28
Appendix 1-3-2 Power supply unit ....................................................................................................A1-37
Appendix 1-3-3 AC rector .................................................................................................................A1-41
A1 - 1
Appendix 1-1 Servomotor outline dimension drawings
Appendix 1-1-1 HC Series
• HC52 (B) S (W) • HC52 (B) T (W) • HC53 (B) S (W) • HC53 (B) T (W)
• HC102 (B) S (W) • HC102(B) T (W) • HC103 (B) S (W) • HC103 (B) T (W) [Unit: mm]
• HC152 (B) S (W) • HC152(B) T (W) • HC153 (B) S (W) • HC153 (B) T (W)
L 55 130
44 12 3 45°
50
Ø24h6
Ø110h7
Ø1
5 65
Ø
14
81.5
111
Oil seal
KL S30457B
21.5
41
Detector 4 - Ø 9mounting hole
connector Power connector
Use a hexagon socket bolt.
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A22-23P
L 58 130
44 12 3
45°
18 28 12
25 10
Ø22
A
Ø110h7
5 Ø1
Ø16.000
A Ø
14 65
81.5
11
1
Tightening torque
23 to 30 N.m
KL U nut M10 1.25
Plain washer 10
21.5
Detector Power Taper 1/10 41
connector connector Oil seal 4 - Ø 9mounting hole
0
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A22-23P S30457B 5 -0.03 Use a hexagon socket
bolt.
5
4.3
Cross section A-A
IP67 specifications
Servomotor type IP65 specifications
(With W)
2000r/min 3000r/min L (Note 1) KL L (Note 1) KL
HC52 (B) HC53 (B) 125 (158) 52 135 (168) 52
HC102 (B) HC103 (B) 150 (183) 77 160 (193) 77
HC152 (B) HC153 (B) 175 (208) 102 185 (218) 102
(Note 1) The dimensions given in parentheses apply for the servomotor with magnetic brakes.
(Note 2) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.
(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.
A1 - 2
• HC202S (W) • HC352S (W) • HC452S (W) [Unit: mm]

• HC203S (W) • HC353S (W)
L 79 176
44 18 3 45
°
+0.010
75
Ø114.3 -0.025
0
0
Ø35
00
81.5
Ø2 Ø2
30
142
Oil seal
KL S40608B
21.5
Detector 4-Ø13.5
connector Power connector 46
Mounting hole
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A24-10P
Use a hexagon socket bolt
Servomotor type
L KL
2000r/min 3000r/min
HC202S HC203S 150 69
HC352S HC353S 192 111
HC452S – 234 153
(Note 3) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).
[Unit: mm]
• HC202BS (W) • HC352BS (W) • HC452BS (W)
• HC203BS (W) • HC353BS (W)
L 79 176
44 1 3 45
°
8
00
Ø35 +0.010
75 Ø2
Ø114.3 0-0.025
0
81.5
Ø2
30
117
142
Oil seal
21.5 KL S40608B
73.5
Detector 4-13.5 46
connector Power connector Mounting hole
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A24-10P Use a hexagon socket bolt
Brake connector
MS3102A10SL-4P
Servomotor type
L KL
2000r/min 3000r/min
HC202BS HC203BS 198 69
HC352BS HC353BS 240 111
HC452BS – 282 153
A1 - 3
• HC702S (W)
• HC453S (W) • HC703S (W) [Unit: mm]
L 79 176
44 18 3 45°
00
Ø2
Ø35 +0.010
75
Ø114.3 -0.025
0
0
Note2
Note2
81.5
Ø
23
0
Note2
Note2
150
KL Oil seal
21.5
S40608B
4-Ø13.5 Mounting hole
58
Detector connector Power connector Use a hexagon socket bolt
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A32-17P
Servomotor type
L KL
2000r/min 3000r/min
– HC453S 234 148
HC702S HC703S 297 211
(Note 2) This applies for the HC702S and HC703S. The HC453S does not have the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).
[Unit: mm]
• HC702BS (W)
• HC453BS (W) • HC703BS(W)
L 79 176
Ø114.3-0.025
18 3
44
0
45°
75
+0.010
Ø35 0
Note2
117
81.5
00 Ø2
Note2 Ø2 30
150
Note2
21.5 KL Oil seal
Note2
S40608B
73.5
Detector
connector Power connector 4-Ø13.5 Mounting hole 58
Brake connector
MS3102A10SL-4P
Servomotor type
L KL
2000r/min 3000r/min
– HC453BS 282 148
HC702BS HC703BS 345 211
(Note 2) This applies for the HC702BS and HC703BS. The HC453BS does not have the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).
A1 - 4
• HC902S (W) [Unit: mm]
364 85 204
44 20 25 3
45°
Ø180 -0.040
0
80
Ø42 -0.016
0
Ø2
Note2 50
81.5
15
Note2 Note2 Oil seal Ø2
Note2 S45629B
150
21.5 278
Detector connector Power connector 4- Ø 15 Mounting hole 60

(Note 2) This is the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).
[Unit: mm]
• HC902BS (W)
412 85 204
44 20 25 3
Ø 18 0 -0 . 0 4 0
45°
0
80
Ø 42 -0 . 0 1 6
0
No t e 2 Ø2
81 .5
5 50
1
No t e 2
Ø2
Note2 Note2
150
21.5 Oil seal

278
S45629B
73.5
Detector connector Power connector 4- Ø 15 Mounting hole
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A32-17P Use a hexagon socket bolt 60
Brake connector
MS3102A10SL-4P
(Note 2) This is the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).
A1 - 5
• HC103R (B) S • HC103R (B) T

• HC153R (B) S • HC153R (B) T
[Unit: mm]
• HC203R (B) S • HC203R (B) T
L 45 100
44 10 3 45°
4- Ø 9 Mounting hole
40
Ø24h6
Ø95h7
Ø
15 13
Ø1
5
81.5
96
Oil seal
S30457B
21.5
KL 41
Detector
connector Power connector
MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A22-23P
58 100
10 3
M10 1.25
18 28 12 45°
4- Ø 9 Mounting hole
Screw

25 10
A
Ø1
15 35
Ø16.000
Ø95h7
A Ø1
Ø22
96
0
5 -0.03
Plain
washer 10 41
0.03
0
5-
Taper 1/10
Tightening torque 23 to 30 N · m
4.3
Oil seal U nut M10 1.25

Cross section A-A S30457B
Servomotor type L (Note 1) KL

HC103R (B) 152 (189) 71
HC153R (B) 177 (214) 96
HC203R (B) 202 (239) 121
A1 - 6
• HC353R (B) S
• HC503R (B) S [Unit: mm]
L 63 130
12 3
44
58 45
°
Note3
Ø28h6
Ø110h7
Note
3
Note3 Ø1
45 65
Ø1
81.5
120
KL Oil seal
21.5 S30457B
Detector 46
connector Power connector 4 - Ø 9 Mounting hole
Servomotor type L (Note 1) KL

HC353R (B) S 222 (258) 148
HC503R (B) S 279 (315) 205
(Note 3) This is for the magnetic brakes.
A1 - 7
Appendix 1-1-2 HA Series
• HA053NS
• HA13NS
[Unit: mm]
0.015
0.03 S
A 0.04 S 85
64
73 26
6 3
Ø80
-0.007
20
-0.030
Ø8
0
Ø52
6
S
Ø7
72
0.5
81
21 B 45°
4-Ø4.5 Mounting hole
Detector connector Power connector Oil seal
MS3102A22-14P MS3102A18-12P GM10204B
Servomotor type A B
HA053NS 139 43
HA13NS 156 60
(Note 3) The servomotor with magnetic brakes is a special specification part. Contact the respective sales office or dealer for
details.
A1 - 8
• HA23NT • HA23NS
• HA33NT • HA33NS [Unit: mm]
0.05 S
0.02
37
0.04 S 0.04 S
23 0.05 S
14 15 8 45 A 30 86
8 3 12 6.3 8 3
45°
25
Ø11h6
Ø112
Ø45
Ø112
Ø80h7
Ø80
Ø45
A
12
S Ø1
Ø80h7
00
Ø11.000
A S
Ø1
80
79
Oil seal
0.5 0.5 S15357B
Oil seal
0
S15357B 4 -0.03 B 4- Ø 6.6 Mounting hole
21 Use a hexagon socket bolt
Power connector
Tightening torque 5 to 6 N · m Detector connector
2.63 4
U nut M6 1.0 Plain washer 6 MS3102A22-14P CE05-2A18-12P

Taper 1/10
0.02
Cross section A-A
Servomotor type A B
HA23N 125 81
HA33N 155 111
• HA23NBT • HA23NBS [Unit: mm]

• HA33NBT • HA33NBS
0.05 S
0.02
37
0.04 S 0.04 S
23 0.05 S
14 15 8 45 A 30 86
8 3 12 6.3 8 3
45°
25
Ø112
Ø45
Ø11h6
Ø112
A
Ø80h7
Ø80
Ø45
12
Ø1
Ø80h7
S
00
Ø11.000
A S
Ø1
80
79
Oil seal 0.5 Oil seal

0 0.5
S15357B 4 -0.03 S15357B
38 B
4- Ø 6.6 Mounting hole
21
4
Brake connector Power connector Use a hexagon socket bolt

Tightening torque 5 to 6 N · m
2.63
MS3102A10SL-4P CE05-2A18-12P
Cross section A-A U nut M6 1.0 Plain washer 6
Detector connector
Taper 1/10
0.02 MS3102A22-14P
Servomotor type A B
HA23NB 162 81
HA33NB 192 111
A1 - 9
• HA-LF11K2-S8
エンコーダ用コネクタ
Detector connector
MS3102A22-14P
480 85
426 □200
4 -φ14.5
4-ø14.5 取付穴
installation hole
6 206 6 262 Use六角穴付ボルトを
hexagon socket
11 Suspension吊りボルト
bolts × 3 positions head bolts.
146 27 3 ケ所使用してください。
(M10) 45°
20 3
ø44 hole
Exhaust 80
排気
M8 ねじ
M8 screw
Intake 5
吸気 φ 21
φ2
50
19.8 5.2
冷却ファン
Cooling fan
rotation
回転方向
direction
Oil seal
オイルシール [Unit: mm]
[単位： mm]
S50689B
(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with M10×20 or smaller bolts.
• HA-LF11K2B-S8
Detector connector ブレーキ用コネクタ
Brake connector
MS3102A22-14P MS3102A10SL-4P Suspension bolt screw hole
吊りボルト用ねじ穴
550 85 (M10 depth
深さ20)
(M10 20)
498 □200
6 206 6 334 55 44-ø14.5
-φ14.5installation
取付穴 hole
Use hexagon socket
六角穴付ボルトを
11 146 27 Suspension吊りボルト
bolts × 3 3positions
ケ所 93
head bolts.
使用してください。
(M10) 45°
ø44 hole
20 3
80
Exhaust
排気
M8ねじ
M8 screw
Intake 5
吸気 φ 21
φ2
50
19.8 5.2
Cooling
冷却ファン fan
rotation
回転方向
direction
Motor flange direction
モータフランジ方向
Oil seal
オイルシール
S45629B
A B
Brake
ブレーキ
[Unit: mm]
Brake connector layout
ブレーキ用コネクタ配置 [単位： mm]
MS3102A10SL-4P
MS3102A10SL-4P
A1 - 10
• HA-LF15K2-S8
Detector connector 吊りボルト 3 bolts
Suspension ケ所 × 3 positions
4- φ14.5
4-ø14.5 取付穴 hole
installation
MS3102A22-14P (M12) 六角穴付ボルトを
Use hexagon socket
495 110 head bolts.
使用してください
6 250 6 209 □250
180 27 200
45 °
ø44 hole
25 5
Exhaust
排気
100 φ
3 00 5
26
φ
吸気
Intake
20.4 6.6
M10 ねじ
M10 screw
6
37
冷却ファン
Cooling fan
回転方向
rotation Oil seal
オイルシール
direction
S709513B
[Unit:
[単位： mm]
mm]
• HA-LF15K2B-S8
Suspension bolt screw hole
Detector connector Suspension
吊りボルト 3 bolts
ケ所 × 3 positions Brake connector
ブレーキ用コネクタ
4-ø14.5
4- installation
φ14.5 取付穴 hole (M12 depth
(M12 深さ22) 22)
MS3102A22-14P (M12) MS3102A10SL-4P Use hexagon socket
六角穴付ボルトを
head使用してください
bolts.
610 110
6 250 6 209 □250

180 27 200 111.5
45 °
ø44 hole
25 5
Exhaust
排気
100
φ 5
30 26
0 φ
Intake
吸気
20.4 6.6
M10 screw
ねじ
Cooling fan
6
37
rotation
冷却ファン
direction
回転方向 Motorモータフランジ方向
flange direction
Oil seal
オイルシール Suspension bolt screw hole
S60829B (M12 depth
(M12 深さ22)22)
A B
Brake
ブレーキ
Brake connector layout
ブレーキ用コネクタ配置
MS3102A10SL-4P
MS3102A10SL-4P
[Unit: mm]
[寸法単位： mm]
A1 - 11
Appendix 1-2 Outline dimension drawings of spindle motor
Appendix 1-2-1 SJ Series

• SJ-30A with standard flange
Terminal box 850

740
665.5 110
20 7 310 7
φ51 189 4-φ19
60 5
110
90 10.5
A
Exhaust air 43 0
8 30
φ
A φ
32
5
Cooling fan 3 5°
Cooling air inlet
16
A 55m6 A
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.
(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.
(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.
• SJ-30A with standard legs

Terminal box
850
345
505 230 110
430.5
6 312 6
90 10.5 189
A
Cooling
Exhaust air air inlet
A
Cooling fan
4-Ø15
127 127 108 55
304 127 127
310
16
A 55m6 A
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 12
• SJ-37BP, SJ-22XW5 with standard flange
Terminal box
909
769
701.5 140
530
25 7 350 7
φ51 224
68 5 4-φ19
140
110 15
A
Exhaust air
0
35
φ
A φ
37
5
50
9
35°
Cooling air inlet
Cooling fan
18
A 60m6 A
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-37BP, SJ-22XW5 with standard legs

Terminal box 909
400.5
508.5 247.5 140 6 352 6
441 224
110 15
A
Cooling
Cooling fan 139.5 139.5 121 70

338 139.5 139.5
350
18
A 60m6 A
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 13
• SJ-45BP, SJ-22XW8 with standard flange

Terminal box 932
792
733 140
30 7 378 7
φ63 278 4-φ19
73 5
140
110 15
A
Exhaust air 58 0
1 40
φ
A
φ
42
5
Cooling fan 35°
Cooling air inlet
φ425
18
A 60m6 A
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-45BP, SJ-22XW8 with standard legs
Terminal box 932

425.5
506.5 272.5 140 6 380 6
447.5 278
φ63
110 15
A
Cooling
4-φ19
Cooling fan 152.5 152.5 133 85
385 159 159
400
18
A 60m6 A
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 14
Appendix 1-2-2 SJ-V Series

• SJ-V2.2-01, SJ-V3.7-02ZM with standard flange
φ35
Terminal box 360

300 60
265
130 12 Flange
□174
4-φ12
48 5 168
45 8
Ａ
Exhaust air 5
18
φ1
Ａ φ φ
90
22 0
Cooling fan 8
Cooling air inlet

5 □176 5
2-M6 Screw
16
φ28j6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V2.2-01, SJ-V3.7-02ZM with standard legs

φ35
360
Terminal box 300 60
265
130
5 176 5
45 8 168
Cooling
Ａ
Cooling fan
75 56 4-φ10 35
105 41 70 70
180
8
2-M6 Screw
16
φ28j6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 15
• SJ-V3.7-01 with standard flange

φ35
390
330 60
295
160 12 Flange
□174
Terminal box 168 4-φ12
48 5
45 8
Ａ
Exhaust air 5
18
φ1
Ａ φ
φ2
90
20
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet
8 5 □176 5
2-M6 Screw
16
φ28j6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V3.7-01 with standard legs

φ35
390
330 60
295
Terminal box 160
5 176 5
45 8 168
Ａ
Cooling
Ａ
Cooling fan
100 56
4-φ10 35
130 41
70 70
180
2-M6 Screw
16
φ28j6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 16
• SJ-V5.5-01 with standard flange

Terminal box 485
425 60
390
255 Flange
12　
φ44 □174
48 5 168
4-φ12
45 7.5
Ａ
Exhaust air 5
φ1
18
Ａ φ
90
φ
22
0
Cooling fan Cooling air inlet

5 □176 5
7
φ
22
φ28h6 3-M4 Screw

ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V5.5-01 with standard legs

φ44
485
425 60
Terminal box 255
390
5 176 5
45 7.5 168
Ａ
Cooling
Ａ
Cooling fan
4-φ10
159 56 35
190 41 70 70
180
7
φ
22
3-M4 Screw
φ28h6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 17
• SJ-V7.5-01, SJ-V7.5-03ZM, SJ-V11-06ZM with standard flange

φ44
Terminal box
520
440 80
403 Flange
238 □204
13 198
47 5 4-φ15
63 8
Ａ
215
φ2
Exhaust air
Ａ φ
φ2
25
50
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet
5 □208 5
10
φ
22
φ32h6 3-M5 Screw
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V7.5-01, SJ-V7.5-03ZM, SJ-V11-06ZM with standard legs

φ44
520
Terminal box 440 80
403
238 5 208 5
198
63 8
Ａ
Cooling
Exhaust air
air inlet
Ａ
Cooling fan 4-φ12

140 70 45
180 50 95 95
230
10
φ22
φ32h6 3-M5 Screw
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 18
• SJ-V11-01, SJ-V11-08ZM with standard flange

φ44
Terminal box 600

490 110
453 Flange
288 □204
13 198
65 5 4-φ15
80 10
Ａ
Exhaust air 15
φ2
φ2
Ａ φ2
25
50
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet

5 □208 5
14
φ
40
φ48h6 3-M5 Screw
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V11-01, SJ-V11-08ZM with standard legs

φ44
Terminal box 600

490 110
453
288 5 208 5
198
80 10
Exhaust air Cooling

air inlet
Ａ
Cooling fan
140 70 45
180 50 95 95
4-φ12
230
14
φ
40
3-M5 Screw
φ48h6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 19
• SJ-V15-01, SJ-V18.5-01, SJ-V11-09, SJ-V15-03, SJ-V22-06ZM with standard flange

φ44
579.5
469.5 110
Terminal box 434.5 266
259.5 □250 Flange
20
198 4-φ15
65 5
80 10
Ａ
Exhaust air
5
26
φ2
Ａ φ φ3
00
75
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet

14
5 □262 5
φ
40
3-M5 Screw
φ48h6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V15-01, SJ-V18.5-01, SJ-V11-09, SJ-V15-03, SJ-V22-06ZM with standard legs

φ44
579.5
469.5 110
Terminal box
434.5
259.5
5 262 5
80 10 198
Ａ
Exhaust air Cooling
air inlet
Ａ
Cooling fan
178 108 50
250 60 4-φ15 127 127
295
14
φ
40
3-M5 Screw
φ48h6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 20
• SJ-V30-02ZM with standard flange

φ51
649.5

499.5 266
329.5 20 □250 Flange
238 4-φ15
65 5
80 10
Ａ
Exhaust air 5
26
φ2
Ａ φ φ3
00
75
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet
5 □262 5
14
φ
40
φ48h6 3-M5 Screw
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V30-02ZM with standard legs

φ51
649.5
499.5
329.5
5 262 5
80 10 238
Ａ
Cooling
Ａ
Cooling fan
178 108 50
250 60 4-φ15 127 127
295
14
φ
40
3-M5 Screw
φ48h6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 21
• SJ-V22-01, SJ-V18.5-03, SJ-V22-05 with standard flange

φ51
649.5

499.5 266
329.5 20 □250 Flange
238 4-φ15
65 5
90 10.5
Ａ
Exhaust air 5
26
φ2
Ａ φ φ3
00
75
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet
5 □262 5
16
φ
45
φ55m6 3-M5 Screw

ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V22-01, SJ-V18.5-03, SJ-V22-05 with standard legs

φ51
649.5
499.5
329.5
5 262 5
90 10.5 238
Ａ
Cooling
Exhaust air
air inlet
Ａ
Cooling fan 178 108 50

275 60 4-φ15 127 127
295
16
φ
45
3-M5 Screw
φ55m6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 22
• SJ-V26-01 with standard flange

φ51
Terminal box 695.5

585.5 110
545.5 Flange
20 □250
375.5
238 4-φ15
65 5
90 10.5
Ａ
Exhaust air 5
26
φ2
Ａ φ φ3
00
75
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet
16 5 □262 5
φ
45
φ55m6 3-M5 Screw
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V26-01 with standard legs

φ51
695.5
Terminal box
585.5 110
545.5
375.5
5 262 5
238
90 10.5
Ａ
Cooling
Ａ
Cooling fan
178 108 50
4-φ15
275 60 127 127
295
16
φ
45
3-M5 Screw
φ55m6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 23
• SJ-V55-01 with standard flange

φ63
Terminal box 864

724 140
672
402 30
□480
75 5 348 4-φ24
110 15
Ａ
Exhaust air
00
φ5
φ5
Ａ φ5
10
50
Cooling fan 35°

Cooling air inlet 2-M10
20
φ
65
φ75m6 3-M6 Screw
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-V55-01 with standard legs

φ63
Terminal box 864

724 140
672
402
6 426 6
110 15 348
Ａ
Cooling
Cooling fan
286 149 4-φ19 80
366 109 178 178
435
20
φ
65
3-M6 Screw
φ75m6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 24
Appendix 1-2-3 SJ-VS Series

• SJ-VS7.5-03ZM with standard flange
φ44
32 453 80
Terminal box
405.5
210 230.5 13 □204

4-φ15
198
47 5
5
21
φ
φ2
φ
75
25
0
ＢＡ
Cooling air inlet
35°
Cooling fan Exhaust air 340 160

504 5 □208 5
M16 LeftM16
screw M16
M16Right screw
ＢＡ
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-VS22-06ZM with standard flange

φ44
32 479 110
Terminal box
411.5
210 241.5 20 □250

4-φ15
238
65 5
5
26
φ2
φ
φ
75
30
0
ＢＡ
Cooling air inlet
35°

545 5 □262 5
M16 LeftM16
screw M16
M16Right screw
ＢＡ
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 25
• SJ-VS30-02ZM with standard flange

φ51
32 549 110
Terminal box
481.5
210 311.5 20 □250

4-φ15
238
65 5
5
26
φ2
φ
75
φ
30
0
ＢＡ
Cooling air inlet
35°

615 5 □ 262 5
M16 LeftM16
screw M16
M16Right screw
ＢＡ
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 26
Appendix 1-2-4 SJ-PMF Series (IPM motor)

• SJ-PMF01830-00 with standard flange
Terminal box
466
8 398 60
2×4-M5 361 164
205 193 146
12
45°
φ35 49 5
45 8
Ａ
□ 62
Exhaust air
φ1
40
45
φ1
Ａ
2-M5 Screw
φ
Flange
16
Cooling fan Cooling air inlet □130
5
□134
4-φ9
8
φ28j6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
• SJ-PMF03530-00 with standard flange

Terminal box
464
384 80 Eyebolts 2-M8
342 198
2×4-M5
200 184 180
15
56
5
67 97
φ3
45 °
φ 65 50 5
a b
63 8 a b
Exhaust air
Ａ
5 φ
18 22
φ 0
Cooling fan
Cooling air inlet
φ1
2-M8 Screw
10
90
Flange
□174
4-φ12
φ32h6
ＡＡ
Cross section
A-A
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 27
Appendix 1-3 Unit outline dimension drawings
Appendix 1-3-1 Servo/spindle drive unit

MDS-C1-V2-0101
MDS-C1-V2-0301
MDS-C1-V2-0303
MDS-C1-V2-0501
MDS-C1-V1-01 MDS-C1-V2-0503
MDS-C1-V1-03 MDS-C1-V2-0505 MDS-C1-SP-04
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
11
2-M4 screw
124.5
16
92
Intake
15
6 (Note 2)
30 (State with terminal block cover removed) 20 180
Terminal block
60 cover 200
• For MDS-C1-V1 and MDS-C1-SP
4-M4 screw
4-M4 screw
• For MDS-C1-V2
360
(Note 1)
7-M4 screw
4-M4 screw
[Unit : mm]
2-M5 screw hole
(Note 1) The square hole does not need to be machined.
Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 2) The MDS-C1-V1-01/03 and MDS-C1-SP-04/075 do not have built-in fans.
A1 - 28
MDS-C1-V2-2010
MDS-C1-V1-20 MDS-C1-V2-2020
MDS-C1-V1-35 MDS-C1-V2-3510S MDS-C1-SP-22
MDS-C1-V1-45S MDS-C1-V2-3520S MDS-C1-SP-37
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
(Note 2)
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
16 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6
30 (State with terminal block cover removed) 20 180 60 15
Terminal block
60 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
• For MDS-C1-V1 and MDS-C1-SP
3-M4 screw
Note that the MDS-C1-V1-45S
uses an 3-M5 screw 2-M4 screw
• For MDS-C1-V2
Square
342
360
hole
(Note 1)
6-M4 screw
3-M4 screw
2-M5 screw hole 52 [Unit : mm]
(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 2) The MDS-C1-V1-20 does not have a fan at the top.
A1 - 29
MDS-C1-V1-45 MDS-C1-V1-70S
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
16 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6
45 (State with terminal block 20 180 60 15
cover removed) Terminal block
90 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
3-M5 screw
2-M5 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
2-M5 screw hole 82

[Unit : mm]
Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.
A1 - 30
MDS-C1-V2-3510
MDS-C1-V2-3520
MDS-C1-V2-3535
MDS-C1-V2-4520
MDS-C1-V2-4535
MDS-C1-V2-4545S MDS-C1-V2-7070S
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
16 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6
90 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
6-M4 screw
3-M4 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
2-M5 screw hole 82

[Unit : mm]
A1 - 31
MDS-C1-SP-55
MDS-C1-SP-75
MDS-C1-SP-110 MDS-C1-SP-150S
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
16 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6
90 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
3-M5 screw
2-M5 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
2-M5 screw hole 82

[Unit : mm]
A1 - 32
MDS-C1-V1-70 MDS-C1-SP-150
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
52
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
46 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6
120 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
3-M5 screw
2-M5 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
2-M5 screw hole 112

[Unit : mm]
A1 - 33
MDS-C1-V2-7035
MDS-C1-V2-4545 MDS-C1-V2-7045
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
52
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
46 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6
120 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
6-M4 screw
3-M4 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
2-M5 screw hole 112

[Unit : mm]
A1 - 34
MDS-C1-V2-7070
MDS-C1-SP-220 MDS-C1-V2-9090S
70
2-ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
52
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
46 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
15
6 6
45 60 (State with terminal block 20 180 60 15
150 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
60
• For MDS-C1-V2
6-M4 screw
3-M4 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1) • For MDS-C1-SP
3-M8 screw
4-M5 2-M8 screw

screw hole 142
[Unit : mm]
A1 - 35
70
2-ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring Exhaust
allowance)
195
360
350
384
52
24
2-M6 screw
11
46 2-M4 screw
124.5
92
6 6 Intake
19
45 60 (State with terminal block 20 180 63 12

150 cover 263
Heat dissipation
allowance
60
3-M8 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
2-M8 screw
4-M5
screw hole 142 [Unit : mm]
A1 - 36
Appendix 1-3-2 Power supply unit
MDS-C1-CV-37
MDS-C1-CV-55
MDS-C1-CV-75
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
11
11
3-M4 screw
16
124.5
81
Intake
15
6 (Note 2)
60 cover 220
Heat dissipation
allowance
3-M4 screw
2-M4 screw
Square
342
360
hole
(Note 1)
(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 2) The MDS-C1-CV-37 does not have a built-in fan.
A1 - 37
MDS-C1-CV-110
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
(Note 2)
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
11
3-M4 screw
16
124.5
81
15
6
90 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
3-M5 screw
2-M5 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 2) The MDS-C1-CV-110 does not have a fan at the top.
A1 - 38
MDS-C1-CV-150
MDS-C1-CV-185
70
ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
(Note 2)
195
360
380
350
22
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
11
3-M4 screw
16
124.5
81
15
6
120 cover 260
Required wind
passage space
3-M5 screw
2-M5 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1)
(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 2) The MDS-C1-CV-150/185 does not have a fan at the top.
A1 - 39
MDS-C1-CV-220
MDS-C1-CV-260
MDS-C1-CV-300
MDS-C1-CV-370
70
2-ø6 hole
10
15
(Wiring
allowance)
Intake
195
360
380
350
42
24
2-M6 screw
Intake
11
11
3-M4 screw
124.5
81
15
6 6 36
45 60 20 180 60 15
Terminal block
150 (State with terminal block cover 260
cover removed) Required wind
passage space
60
3-M8 screw
342
360
Square hole
(Note 1) 2-M8 screw
4-M5
screw hole 142 [Unit : mm]
A1 - 40
Appendix 1-3-3 AC rector
• B-AL-7.5K
MAIN
6-M5 screw
L11 L21 L31
130
82
FG grounding L12 L22 L32
position
DRIVE
PE grounding position
(with grounding mark) 55±1 4-8×15 slot
Terminal cover
155
125
165±2
[Unit: mm]
• B-AL-11K
MAIN
6-M5 screw
L11 L21 L31
130
75

position DRIVE
Terminal cover
155
125
165±2
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 41
• B-AL-18.5K
MAIN
6-M6 screw
L11 L21 L31
105
140
position
DRIVE
Terminal cover
155
125
165±2
[Unit: mm]
• B-AL-30K
MAIN
6-M6 screw
L11 L21 L31
140
110

position
DRIVE
Terminal cover
155
125
165±2
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 42
• B-AL-37K
MAIN
6-M6 screw
L11 L21 L31
150
110
position
DRIVE
Terminal cover
175
145
220±2
[Unit: mm]
A1 - 43
Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications
Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable.............................................................................................................A2-2

Appendix 2-1-1 Cable wire and assembly ..........................................................................................A2-2
Appendix 2-1-2 Flexible conduits........................................................................................................A2-4
Appendix 2-2 Cable connection diagram ...............................................................................................A2-6
Appendix 2-3 Connector outline dimension drawings..........................................................................A2-12
A2 - 1
Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable
Appendix 2-1-1 Cable wire and assembly
(1) Cable wire

The following shows the specifications and processing of the wire used in each cable. Manufacture
the cable using the following recommended wire or equivalent parts.
Recommended Wire characteristics

wire model
Finished
(Cannot be directly Sheath No. of Heat Applica-
outside Config- Conductor Withstand Insulation
ordered from material pairs resistant tion
diameter uration resistance voltage resistance
Mitsubishi temperature
Electric Corp.)
NC unit
UL20276 AWG28 7 strands/ 222Ω/km 1MΩ/km
6.1mm PVC 10 AC350/ 1min 80°C communi-
10pair 0.13mm or less or more
cation cable
40
105Ω/km 1500MΩ/k Detector
A14B2343 (Note 1) 7.2mm PVC 6 strands/ AC500/ 1min 105°C
or less m or more cable
0.08mm
60
2 63Ω/km
2 strands/ Detector
(0.3 mm ) or less
0.08mm AC750V/ 60MΩ/km cable
TS-91026 (Note 2) 11.6mm PVC 60°C
40 1min or more (Cable length:
10 95Ω/km
2 strands/ 20m or more)
(0.2 mm ) or less
0.08mm
(Note 1) Junko Co. (Dealer: Toa Denki)
(Note 2) BANDO ELECTRIC WIRE (http: //www.bew.co.jp)
(2) Cable assembly

Assemble the cable as shown in the following drawing, with the cable shield wire securely
connected to the ground plate of the connector.
Core wire Core wire
Shield
Shield (external conductor) (external conductor) Sheath
Sheath
Ground plate
A2 - 2
(3) Cable protection tube (noise countermeasure)

If influence from noise is unavoidable, or further noise resistance is required, selecting a flexible
tube and running the signal cable through this tube is effective. This is also an effective
countermeasure for preventing the cable sheath from being cut or becoming worn.
A cable clamp (MS3057) is not installed on the detector side, so be particularly careful of broken
wires in applications involving bending and vibration.
Connector
Supplier Tube
Drive unit side Installation screws Motor detector side
RBC-104 (straight) G16
Nippon Flex FBA-4
RBC-204 (45°) G16 RCC-104-CA2022
Control Corp. (FePb wire braid sheath)
RBC-304 (90°) G16
PSG-104 (straight) Screw diameter ø26.4
DAIWA DENGYO Hi-flex
PLG-17 (90°) Screw diameter ø26.4 PDC20-17
CO., LTD PT #17 (FePb sheath)
PS-17 (straight) PF1/2
Purika Tube
Sankei Works BC-17 (straight) Wire tube screws : 15 PDC20-17
PA-2 #17 (FePb sheath)
(Note) None of the parts in this table can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp.
A2 - 3
Appendix 2-1-2 Flexible conduits
Basically, splash proofing can be ensured if cab-tire cable and connectors with IP65 or higher
specifications are used. However, to further improve the oil resistance (chemical resistance to oil),
weather resistance (resistance to the environment when used outdoors, etc.), durability, tensile strength,
flattening strength, etc., run the cable through a flexible conduit when wiring.
The following shows an example of a flexible conduit. Contact the connector maker for more
information.
(1) Method for connecting to a connector with back shell
Connector with Connector

back shell for conduit Flexible conduit
Cable
Model
Appli- DDK Nippon Flex
Applicable motors
cation Connector for Flexible
Connector (straight) Connector (angle)
conduit conduit
For HA053N, HA13N VF-03
power HA23N, HA33N RCC-103CA18 (Min. inside
diameter: 10.6)
CE05-6A18-12SD-B-BSS CE05-8A18-12SD-B-BAS
VF-04
RCC-104CA18 (Min. inside
diameter: 14)
HC52, HC102, HC152 VF-04
HC53, HC103, HC153 RCC-104CA2022 (Min. inside
HC103R, HC153R, diameter: 14)
HC203R VF-06
diameter: 19)
HC202, HC352, HC452 VF-06
HC203, HC353 RCC-106CA2428 (Min. inside
HC353R, HC503R diameter: 19)
VF-08
diameter: 24.4)
HC702, HC902 VF-08
HC453, HC703 RCC108CA32 (Min. inside
diameter: 24.4)
VF-10
RCC110CA32 (Min. inside
diameter: 33.0)
A2 - 4
Connector
Back shell for conduit Flexible conduit
Cable
Connector
Model
Appli- DDK Nippon Flex
Applicable motors
cation
Connector/back Connector/back Connector for
Flexible conduit
shell (straight) shell (angle) conduit
For HA053NB to HA33NB
brake HC202B to HC902B Select according to section "(2) Method for connecting to the connector main body".
HC203B to HC703B
For HA053N to HA33N Connector Connector VF-04
RCC-104CA2022
detector HC52 to HC902, HC53 to HC703 MS3106A22-14S MS3106A22-14S (Min. Inside diameter: 14)
HC103R to HC503R (D190) (D190)
VF-06
HA-LF11K2-S8, HA-LF15K2-S8 Back shell Back shell RCC-106CA2022
(Min. Inside diameter: 19)
CE02-22BS-S CE-22BA-S
(2) Method for connecting to the connector main body
Connector
for conduit Flexible conduit
Cable
Connector
Model
Appli-
Applicable motors DDK DAIWA DENGYO
cation
Connector (straight) Connector for conduit Flexible conduit
For HA053N, HA13N MSA-12-18 (Straight) FCV12
power HA23N, HA33N CE05-6A18-12SD-B MAA-12-18 (Angle) (Min. inside diameter: 12.3)
MSA-16-18 (Straight) FCV16
MAA-16-18 (Angle) (Min. inside diameter: 15.8)
HC52, HC102, HC152 MSA-16-22 (Straight) FCV16
HC53, HC103, HC153 MAA-16-22 (Angle) (Min. inside diameter: 15.8)
CE05-6A22-23SD-B
HC103R, HC153R, HC203R MSA-22-22 (Straight) FCV22
HC202, HC352, HC452 MSA-22-24 (Straight) FCV22
HC203, HC353 MAA-22-24 (Angle) (Min. inside diameter: 20.8)
CE05-6A24-10SD-B
HC353R, HC503R MSA-28-24 (Straight) FCV28
HC702, HC902 FCV36
CE05-6A32-17SD-B Please contact to a maker.
HC453, HC703 (Min. inside diameter: 35.0)
For HA053NB to HA33NB
MSA-10-10 (Straight) FCV10
brake HC202B to HC902B MS3106A10SL-4S (D190)
HC203B to HC703B
For HA053N to HA33N MSA-16-22 (Straight) FCV16
detector HC52 to HC902, MAA-16-22 (Angle) (Min. inside diameter: 15.8)
HC53 to HC703
MS3106A22-14S (D190)
HC103R to HC503R MSA-22-22 (Straight) FCV22
HA-LF11K2-S8, MAA-22-22 (Angle) (Min. inside diameter: 20.8)
HA-LF15K2-S8
A2 - 5
Appendix 2-2 Cable connection diagram
1. Do not mistake the connection when manufacturing the detector cable.

Failure to observe this could lead to faults, runaway or fires.
CAUTION 2. Do not connect anything to pins unless otherwise particularly specified when
manufacturing a cable. (Leave OPEN)
3. Contact Mitsubishi when manufacturing a cable longer than 30m.
(1) NC bus cable

<SH21 cable connection diagram>
Drive unit side connector Drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008 Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
1 1
11 11
2 2
12 12
3 3
13 13
4 4
14 14
5 5
15 15
6 6
16 16
7 7
17 17
8 8
18 18
9 9
19 19
10 10
20 20
PE PE FG
A2 - 6

<CNV12/CNV13 cable connection diagram> The connection differs according to the cable length.
Servo drive unit side connector Servomotor detector side/

Connector: 10120-3000VE Ball screw end detector side connector
(One-touch type lock) <For general environment> <IP65 compatible>
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008 Plug: MS3106B22-14S (Straight) Plug:
(Screw-type lock) MS3108B22-14S (Angle) MS3106A22-14S(D190)
Shell kit: 10320-52A0-008 Clamp: MS3057-12A Straight back shell:
CE02-22BS-S (Straight)
SD CE-22BA-S (Angle)
6 H
SD* Clamp: CE3057-12A-3
16 J
7 K RQ
17 L RQ*
9 E BAT
19
10 S P5(+5V)
20
1 R
11 LG
PE N FG
<For 20m or less>
6 H SD
16 J SD*
7 K RQ
17 L RQ*
9 E BAT
19
10
20 S P5(+5V)
1
11 R LG
PE N FG
<For 20m to 30m>
A2 - 7
<CNL3H1,CNL3H2,CNL3H1-S,CNL3H2-S cable connection diagram>
Servo drive unit side connector MDS-B-HR unit side connector

Connector:10120-3000VE Plug: RM15WTP-8S
(One-touch type lock) Clamp: RM15WTP-CP(10)
Shell kit:10320-52F0-008
(Screw-type lock)
Shell kit: 10320-52A0-008
6 3 SD
16 4 SD*
7 1 RQ
17 2 RQ*
19
5 P5(+5V)
10
6 P5(+5V)
20
1 7 LG
11 8 LG
PE PE FG
A2 - 8

<CNP5 cable connection diagram>
(CN5) Spindle drive unit side Spindle motor side connector

connector Housing: 350720-1
Connector: 10120-3000VE Pin: 350689-1
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
PA 6 1
RA 16 2
PB 7 3
RB 17 4
PZ 8 5
P15(+15V) 5 8
N15(-15V) 15 6
LG 1 9
MOH 3
RG V1.25-4
13
100mm
<CNP6M cable connection diagram>
(CN6) Spindle drive unit side Magnetic sensor side connector

connector Connector: TRC116-12A10-7F10.5
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
MAG 6 A
MAGR 16 D
LS 7 F
LSR 17 E
P15(+15V) 5 C
LG 15 B
<CNP6A cable connection diagram>
(CN6) Spindle drive unit side Spindle end detector side connector
connector Plug: MS3106B20-29S (Straight)
Connector: 10120-3000VE MS3108B20-29S (Angle)
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008 Clamp: MS3057-12A
MA 2 A
MA* 12 N
MB 3 C
MB* 13 R
MZ 4 B
MZ* 14 P
P5(+5V) 10 H
LG 1 K
P5(+5V) 19
LG 11
P5(+5V) 20
LG 15
The shield of the spindle detector cable is not connected to the "FG" (earth). Do
CAUTION not connect the cable shield to the earth by clamping the cable, etc.
A2 - 9
(CN7) Spindle drive unit side C-axis detector side connector

CA 2 F
CA* 12 L
CB 3 G
CB* 13 M
CZ 4 S
CZ* 14 T
P5(+5V) 10 H
LG 1 K
P5(+5V) 19
LG 11
P5(+5V) 20
LG 15
E
B24-9
<CNP7B cable connection diagram>

connector Housing: 69176-020
Connector: 10120-3000VE Pin: 48235-000
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
CA 2 1
CA* 12 11
CB 3 2
CB* 13 12
CZ 4 3
CZ* 14 13
P5(+5V) 10 7
LG 1 9
P5(+5V) 19 8
LG 11 18
P5(+5V) 20 17
LG 15 19
20
B24-9
<CNP7H cable connection diagram>

connector Housing: JAC-15P
Connector: 10120-3000VE Pin: J-SP1140
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
CA 2 1
CA* 12 2
CB 3 3
CB* 13 4
CZ 4 5
CZ* 14 6
LG 1 7
LG 11
LG 15
A2 - 10

CA 2 F
CA* 12 L
CB 3 G
CB* 13 M
CZ 4 S
CZ* 14 T
P5(+5V) 10 H
LG 1 K
P5(+5V) 19
LG 11
P5(+5V) 20
LG 15
(CN6) Spindle drive unit side

connector
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
MA
2 A
MA*
12 N
MB
3 C
MB*
13 R
MZ
4 B
MZ*
14 P
PE
E
B24-9
<FCUA-R220 cable connection diagram>
(CN7) MDS-B-PJEX unit 24VDC (+) power side connector

side connector Crimped terminal: V1.25-3
Connector: 2-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-5
FG 3 FG
GND 2 GND
+24V 1 +24V
A2 - 11
Appendix 2-3 Connector outline dimension drawings
Connector for CN2 Servo drive unit

Manufacturer: 3M (Ltd.) [Unit: mm]
<Type>
Connector: 10120-3000VE 12.0
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
10.0
22.0 14.0
39.0
23.8
33.3 12.7

<Type>
12.0
Shell kit: 10320-52A0-008
10.0
22.0 14.0
39.0
23.8
33.3 12.7

<Type>
Connector: 10120-6000EL
11.5
Shell kit: 10320-3210-000
Because this connector is an 20.9

integrated molding part of the
cable, it is not an option
setting in the connector set.
The terminal connector
42.0
33.0
(A-TM) also has the same

outline.
29.7
A2 - 12
Connectors for detector and motor power (IP67 and EN standard compatible)
Straight plug D or less
W A
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) 7.85 or more
øC± 0.8
-0.38
øB +0
[Unit: mm]
Type A B +0
–0.38
C±0.8 D or less W
1
CE05-6A18-12SD-B-BSS 1 /8-18UNEF-2B 34.13 32.1 57 1-20UNEF-2A
3 3
CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS 1 /8-18UNEF-2B 40.48 38.3 61 1 /16-18UNEF-2A
1 7
CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS 1 /2-18UNEF-2B 43.63 42.0 68 1 /16-18UNEF-2A
3
CE05-6A32-17SD-B-BSS 2-18UNS-2B 56.33 54.2 79 1 /4-18UNS-2A
Angle plug D or less

A
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)
R± 0.7
-0.38
øB +0
Y or more
(S)±1
U ±0.7
W
[Unit: mm]
+0 Y or
Type A B –0.38 D or less W R±0.7 U±0.7 (S) ±1
more
1
CE05-8A18-12SD-B-BAS 1 /8-18UNEF-2B 34.13 69.5 1-20UNEF-2A 13.2 30.2 43.4 7.5
3 3
CE05-8A22-23SD-B-BAS 1 /8-18UNEF-2B 40.48 75.5 1 /16-18UNEF-2A 16.3 33.3 49.6 7.5
1 7
CE05-8A24-10SD-B-BAS 1 /2-18UNEF-2B 43.63 86.3 1 /16-18UNEF-2A 18.2 36.5 54.7 7.5
3
CE05-8A32-17SD-B-BAS 2-18UNS-2B 56.33 93.5 1 /4-18UNS-2A 24.6 44.5 61.9 8.5
Cable clamp (D)

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) A
C
1.6
V screw
G ± 0.7
B ± 0.7
(Bushing inside
øF
diameter)
øE
(Cable clamp inside
diameter)
H
(Moveable range of one side)
[Unit: mm]
Effective
Total Outside Installation
Shell length screw Compliant
Type dia. screw Bushing
size length cable
V
A B C D E F G H
CE3057-10A-2 (D265) 18 23.8 30.1 10.3 41.3 15.9 11 31.7 3.2 1-20UNEF-2B CE3420-10-2 ø8.5 to ø11
CE3057-12A-2 (D265) 20 13 3 CE3420-12-2 ø9.5 to ø13
23.8 35 10.3 41.3 19 37.3 4 1 /16-18UNEF-2B
CE3057-12A-3 (D265) 22 10 CE3420-12-3 ø6.8 to ø10
CE3057-16A-2 (D265) 24 26.2 42.1 10.3 41.3 23.8 15.5 42.9 4.8 17/16-18UNEF-2B CE3420-16-2 ø13 to ø15.5
CE3057-20A-1 (D265) 32 27.8 51.6 11.9 43.0 31.7 23.8 51.6 6.3 13/4-18UNS-2B CE3420-20-1 ø22 to ø23.8
A2 - 13
Connectors for detector, motor power and brake (IP67 and EN standard compatible)
Straight plug
Gasket A
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) J ± 0.12
øG +0.05
-0.38
-0.25
øB +0
D E±0.3
H or less C±0.5
[Unit: mm]
+0.05
Type A B+0
–0.38 C±0.5 D E±0.3 G –0.25 J±0.12
5 9
MS3106A10SL-4S (D190) /8-24UNEF-2B 22.22 23.3 /16-24UNEF-2A 7.5 12.5 13.49
3 1
MS3106A22-14S (D190) 1 /8-18UNEF-2B 40.48 34.11 1 /4-18UNEF-2A 12.15 29.9 18.26
Straight back shell

L
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) W screw
B
V screw
O-ring
øA
øC
7.85 or more D
(Effective screw length) (Spanner grip)
[Unit: mm]
Type L A B C D V W
1 3
CE02-22BS-S 35 36.5 10.9 17.8 32.4 1 /4-18UNEF-2B 1 /16-18UNEF-2A
Angle back shell [Unit: mm]

50.5 or less
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) 1
1 /4-18UNEF-2B screw
Type: CE-22BA-S 39.6 or less
16.3
O-ring
ø38.6
(49.6)
7.5 or more
33.3
3
1 /16-18UNEF-2A screw
A2 - 14
Connectors for detector, motor power and brake (for general environment)
Straight plug
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) L or less
W or
more J ±0.12
-0.38
Y or less
øQ +0
V
[Unit: mm]
Connection Cable clamp Effective
Coupling Length of Total Max.
nut outside installation screw
Type screw coupling section length width
diameter screw length
+0
A J±0.12 L or less øQ –0.38 V W or more Y or less
1
MS3106B18-12S 1 /8-18UNEF 18.26 52.37 34.13 1-20UNEF 9.53 42
MS3106B22-14S 3 3
1 /8-18UNEF 18.26 55.57 40.48 1 /16-18UNEF 9.53 50
MS3106B22-23S
1 7
MS3106B24-10S 1 /2-18UNEF 18.26 58.72 43.63 1 /16-18UNEF 9.53 53
3
MS3106B32-17S 2-18UNS 18.26 61.92 56.33 1 /4-18UNS 11.13 66
Angle plug
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.) L or less
J±0.12
R±0.5
A
-0.38
+0
øQ
U±0.5
V
more
W or
[Unit: mm]
Connectio
Length of Cable clamp Effective
Coupling Total n nut
coupling installation screw
Type screw length outside
section screw length
diameter
+0
A J±0.12 L or less øQ –0.38 R±0.5 U±0.5 V W or more
1
MS3108B18-12S 1 /8-18UNEF 18.26 68.27 34.13 20.5 30.2 1-20UNEF 9.53
3
MS3108B22-14S 3 1 /16-18UNE
1 /8-18UNEF 18.26 76.98 40.48 24.1 33.3 9.53
MS3108B22-23S F
7
1 1 /16-18UNE
MS3108B24-10S 1 /2-18UNEF 18.26 86.51 43.63 25.6 36.5 9.53
F
3
MS3108B32-17S 2-18UNS 18.26 95.25 56.33 32.8 44.4 1 /4-18UNS 11.13
Straight plug [Unit: mm]

13.5±0.3
Manufacturer: Japan Aviation 5
5
/8-24UNEF-2B
/8-24UNEF-2A
Electronics (Ltd.)
Type: MS3106B10SL-4S
ø22.2±0.8
Effective screw 9.5

length or more
(Including relief 38.9
of 2.77 or less) or less
A2 - 15
Connectors for detector, motor power and brake (for general environment)
Angle plug [Unit: mm]
Manufacturer:
13.5±0.3 5
/8-24UNEF-2B
Japan Aviation
Electronics (Ltd.)
ø22.2±0.8
Type: MS3108B10SL-4S
9.5 or more
ø25.0±0.8
5
/8-24UNEF-2A 36.9±0.8
46.0 or less
Cable clamp
A±0.7
Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)
C
øE (Bushing inside diameter)
1.6
øD (Cable clamp inside diameter)

V
øB±0.7
G±0.7
F (Moveable range)
[Unit: mm]
Effective
Total Outside Installation
screw
Type Shell size length diameter screw Bushing
length
A±0.7 øB±0.7 C øD øE F G±0.7 V
5
MS3057-4A 10SL, 12S 20.6 20.6 10.3 7.9 5.6 1.6 22.2 /8-24UNEF AN3420-4
MS3057-10A 18 23.8 30.1 10.3 15.9 14.3 3.2 31.7 1-20UNEF AN3420-10
MS3057-12A 20, 22 23.8 35.0 10.3 19.0 15.9 4.0 37.3 13/16-18UNEF AN3420-12
MS3057-16A 24, 28 26.2 42.1 10.3 23.8 19.1 4.8 42.9 17/16-18UNEF AN3420-16
MS3057-20A 32 27.8 51.6 11.9 43 31.7 6.3 51.6 13/4-18UNEF AN3420-20
A2 - 16
Appendix 3-1 Selecting the servomotor series.......................................................................................A3-2

Appendix 3-1-1 Motor series characteristics ......................................................................................A3-2
Appendix 3-1-2 Servomotor precision ................................................................................................A3-3
Appendix 3-2 Selection of servomotor capacity .....................................................................................A3-4
Appendix 3-2-1 Load inertia ratio........................................................................................................A3-4
Appendix 3-2-2 Short time characteristics..........................................................................................A3-4
Appendix 3-2-3 Continuous characteristics ........................................................................................A3-5
Appendix 3-3 Example of servo selection ..............................................................................................A3-7
Appendix 3-3-1 Motor selection calculation........................................................................................A3-7
Appendix 3-3-2 Servo selection results ............................................................................................A3-10
Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque.........................................................................A3-11
Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation...................................................................A3-12
Appendix 3-4 Selecting the power supply ............................................................................................A3-13
Appendix 3-4-1 Selecting according to the continuous rated capacity.............................................A3-13
Appendix 3-4-2 Selection with maximum momentary capacity ........................................................A3-14
Appendix 3-4-3 Selection example ...................................................................................................A3-15
A3 - 1
Appendix 3-1 Selecting the servomotor series
Appendix 3-1-1 Motor series characteristics
The servomotor series is categorized according to purpose, motor inertia size, and detector resolution.
Select the motor series that matches the purpose of the machine to be installed.
Motor series characteristics
Motor Detector
Capacity (rated speed) Features
series resolution
HC 0.5 to 9.0kW (2000r/min) 1,000,000 p/rev This is a motor for NC machine tool feed axes. It has smooth torque
0.5 to 7.0kW (3000r/min) /100,000 p/rev characteristics and is compatible with high resolution detectors. It
has the same shaft shape and flange size as conventional HA
motors (HAN), but with shorter L dimensions, designing machine
becomes easier. It is drip-proofed against cutting oil entering the
unit, and it clears IP65 specifications for environmental resistance
performance as a standard.
HCR 1.0 to 5.0kW (3000r/min) 1,000,000 p/rev This is the standard HC motor made into a low inertia motor. It has a
/100,000 p/rev high output, compact design, and is suitable for high speed driving
of light loads such as loaders. The detector has been made
compatible with the feed axis. It is drip-proofed against cutting oil
entering the unit, and it clears IP65 specifications for environmental
resistance performance as a standard.
HAN 0.05 to 0.45kW (3000r/min) 1,000,000 p/rev This is a motor for conventional NC machine tool feed axes. This
/100,000 p/rev motor is used for the small capacity feed axes of which no HC motor
capacity being set.
HA-LF 11 to 15kW (2000r/min) 1,000,000 p/rev This is a motor for NC machine tool large capacity feed axes.
/100,000 p/rev Select the HA-LF Series when the HC motor capacity range is
exceeded.
A3 - 2
Appendix 3-1-2 Servomotor precision
The control precision of the servomotor is determined by the detector resolution, motor characteristics
and parameter adjustment. This section examines the following four types of servomotor control
precision when the servo parameters are adjusted. When selecting a servo, confirm that these types of
precision satisfy the machine specifications before determining the servomotor series.
(1) Theoretic precision: ∆ε

This value is determined by the motor detector precision, and is the value obtained by dividing the
movement amount (∆S) per motor rotation by the detector resolution (RNG).
(2) Positioning precision : ∆εp
This is the precision outline that affects the machine targeted for positioning, and expresses the
machine's positioning precision.
When the motor is a single unit, this is determined by the detector resolution and matches with the
theoretic precision ∆εp. When the motor is actually installed on a machine, the positioning precision
∆εp becomes 1 to 2 times the theoretic precision ∆ε. This is due to the effect on the motor control by
the machine rigidity, etc. Furthermore, the value to which the error from the motor shaft to the
machine end is added becomes the actual machine end positioning precision. If accurate
positioning precision is required at the machine end, use the MDS-C1-V1/V2 series servo drive unit
that allows the scale feedback to be input.
(3) Surface precision during machining : ∆εv
This is the precision outline that affects the machine tools, etc., which are important factors in the
machine operation path and interpolation functions. It also affects the surface roughness of the
machining surface. The machining surface roughness is affected by elements caused by the
detector resolution, the motor's electrical characteristics (torque ripple, etc.) and mechanical
characteristics (cogging torque, etc.). In the NC unit feed axis motor (HC‫ڤ‬, HA‫ڤ‬N) those torque
characteristics are excellent, and higher precision machining is possible than that of other motors.
Because the effects of torque ripple and cogging torque are relatively small in motors with large
amounts of inertia, the motor with the larger inertia, among the two identical capacity motors, will be
more advantageous for surface precision. Due to the effects of differences in characteristics of the
motor itself, the surface precision during machining will differ greatly according to the motor series.
(4) Absolute position repeatability precision: ∆εa
This is the precision outline that affects the absolute position system machine, and expresses the
precision in repeatability of the position before the power was shut off and the position when the
power is turned on again. With the single motor unit, the precision is 1 to 2 times the theoretic
precision ∆ε. Note that the absolute position repeatability ∆εa is the difference between when the
power was turned off last and returned on. This error is not cumulated.
A3 - 3
Appendix 3-2 Selection of servomotor capacity

The following three elements are used to determine the servomotor capacity.
1. Load inertia ratio
2. Short time characteristics (acceleration/deceleration torque)
3. Continuous characteristics (continuous effective load torque)
Carry out appropriate measures, such as changing the motor series or increasing the motor capacity, if
any of the above conditions is not fulfilled.
Appendix 3-2-1 Load inertia ratio
Each servomotor has an appropriate load inertia ratio (load inertia/motor inertia). The control becomes
unstable when the load inertia ratio is too large, and the servo parameter adjustment becomes difficult.
It becomes difficult to improve the surface precision in the feed axis, and the positioning time cannot be
shortened in the positioning axis because the settling time is longer.
If the load inertia ratio exceeds the recommended value in the servomotor specifications list, increase
the motor capacity or change to a motor series with a larger inertia. Note that the recommended value
for the load inertia ratio is strictly one guideline. This does not mean that controlling of the load with
inertia exceeding the recommended value is impossible.
1. When selecting feed axis servomotors for NC unit machine tools, place
importance on the surface precision during machining. To do this, always
select a servomotor with a load inertia ratio within the recommended value.
POINT Select the lowest value possible within that range.
2. Judge the load inertia ratio for the motor with brakes using the motor inertia of
motors without brakes as a reference.
Appendix 3-2-2 Short time characteristics
In addition to the continuous operation range, the servomotor has the short time operation range that
can only be used for short times such as acceleration/deceleration. This range is expressed at the
maximum torque. The maximum torque differs for each motor even at the same capacity, so confirm the
specifications in section "2-1 Servomotor".
The maximum torque affects the acceleration/deceleration time constant that can be driven. The linear
acceleration/deceleration time constant ta can be approximated from the machine specifications using
expression (a). Determine the maximum motor torque required from this expression, and select the
motor capacity.
(JL + JM) × N
ta = (ms) .................................................. (a)
95.5 × (0.8 × TMAX − TL)
N : Motor reach speed (r/min)

JL : Motor shaft conversion load inertia (kg.cm2)
JM : Motor inertia (kg.cm2)
TMAX : Maximum motor torque (N.m)
TL : Motor shaft conversion load (friction, unbalance) torque (N.m)
A3 - 4
Appendix 3-2-3 Continuous characteristics
A typical operation pattern is assumed, and the motor's continuous effective load torque (Trms) is
calculated from the motor shaft conversion and load torque. If numbers <1> to <8> in the following
drawing were considered a one cycle operation pattern, the continuous effective load torque is obtained
from the root mean square of the torque during each operation, as shown in the expression (b).
<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8>
Motor
speed 0
T1
T7
T2 T4
Motor
torque 0
Time
T3 T6 T8
T5
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8
t0
Fig. 1 Continuous operation pattern
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Trms = T1 ·t1 + T2 ·t2 + T3 ·t3 + T4 ·t4 + T5 ·t5 + T6 ·t6 + T7 ·t7 + T8 ·t8 .................... (b)
t0
Select a motor so that the continuous effective load torque Trms is 80% or less of the motor stall torque
Tst.
Trms ≤ 0.8 . Tst .................................................. (c)
The amount of acceleration torque (Ta) shown in tables 11-6 and 11-7 is the torque to accelerate the
load inertia in a frictionless state. It can be calculated by the expression (d). (For linear acceleration/
deceleration)
(JL + JM) × N
Ta = (N.m) .................................................. (d)
95.5 × ta
N : Motor reach speed (r/min)

JL : Motor shaft conversion load inertia (kg.cm2)
JM : Motor inertia (kg.cm2)
ta : Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant (ms)
For an unbalance axis, select a motor so that the motor shaft conversion load torque (friction torque +
unbalance torque) is 60% or less of the stall.
TL ≤ 0.6 . Tst .................................................. (e)
A3 - 5
(1) Horizontal axis load torque

When operations <1> to <8> are for a horizontal axis, calculate so that the following torques are
required in each period.
Load torques of horizontal axes
Period Load torque calculation method Explanation

Normally the acceleration/deceleration time constant is
(Amount of acceleration torque) +
<1> calculated so that this torque is 80% of the maximum torque of
(Kinetic friction torque)
the motor.
<2> (Kinetic friction torque) –
The absolute value of the acceleration torque amount is same
(Amount of deceleration torque) + as the one of the deceleration torque amount. The signs for the
<3>
(Kinetic friction torque) amount of acceleration torque and amount of deceleration
torque are reversed.
Calculate so that the static friction torque is always required
<4> (Static friction torque)
during a stop.
− (Amount of acceleration torque) − The signs are reversed with period <1> when the kinetic friction
<5>
(Kinetic friction torque) does not change according to movement direction.
The signs are reversed with period <2> when the kinetic friction
<6> − (Kinetic friction torque)
does not change according to movement direction.
− (Amount of deceleration torque) − The signs are reversed with period <3> when the kinetic friction
<7>
(Kinetic friction torque) does not change according to movement direction.
Calculate so that the static friction torque is always required
<8> − (Static friction torque)
during a stop.
(2) Unbalance axis load torque

When operations <1> to <8> are for an unbalance axis, calculate so that the following torques are
required in each period. Note that the forward speed shall be an upward movement.
Load torques of unbalance axes
Period Load torque calculation method Explanation

Normally the acceleration/deceleration time constant is
(Amount of acceleration torque) + (Kinetic
<1> calculated so that this torque is 80% of the maximum
friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)
torque of the motor.
<2> (Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque) –
The absolute value of the acceleration torque amount
(Amount of deceleration torque) + (Kinetic is same as the one of the deceleration torque amount.
<3>
friction torque) + (Unbalance torque) The signs for the amount of acceleration torque and
amount of deceleration torque are reversed.
The holding torque during a stop becomes fairly large.
<4> (Static friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)
(Upward stop)
− (Amount of acceleration torque) − (Kinetic
<5> –
The generated torque may be in the reverse of the
<6> − (Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque) movement direction, depending on the size of the
unbalance torque.
− (Amount of deceleration torque) − (Kinetic
<7> –
The holding torque becomes smaller than the upward
<8> − (Static friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)
stop. (Downward stop)
During a stop, the static friction torque may constantly be applied. The static
friction torque and unbalance torque may be applied during an unbalance axis
POINT upward stop, and the torque during a stop may become extremely large.
Therefore, caution is advised.
A3 - 6
Appendix 3-3 Example of servo selection
A servomotor is selected using a machining center with the following specifications as an example.
Specification item Unit X axis Y axis Z axis
Axis type Linear Linear Linear
Movement direction Horizontal Horizontal Vertical
Table support method Rolling Rolling Rolling
Table movement friction coefficient % 5 5 2
Ball screw diameter mm 40 40 40

Ball screw length mm 900 800 1000
Ball screw lead mm 10 10 10
Deceleration ratio 1 1 2/3
kg.cm
2
Primary side gear inertia − − 1.6
kg.cm
2
Secondary side gear inertia − − 8.1
kg.cm
2
Motor/ball screw connection section inertia 2.0 2.0 −
Weight of moving object installed on the
kg 500 400 400
machine (table, etc.)
Weight of standard-added-moving object
kg 100 100 10
(workpiece, etc.)
Rapid traverse rate mm/min 30000 30000 20000

Target acceleration/deceleration time
ms 120 120 120
constant
times/mi
Rapid traverse positioning frequency 20 20 20
n
Motor brake Without Without With
Appendix 3-3-1 Motor selection calculation

Deceleration ratio = 2/3
The selection calculation is carried out in order using the Z axis as
an example. Secondary Primary side
side gear gear
8.1kg·cm2 1.6kg·cm2
(1) Obtaining the load inertia
Calculate the motor shaft conversion load inertia separately 400kg Servomotor
for the rotation load and linear movement load. Furthermore,
calculate the rotation load inertia separately for the primary
and secondary side.
• Primary side rotation load inertia: JR1 10kg Ball screw
ø40, 1000mm
This is the primary side gear inertia.
Fig. 11-3 Z axis configuration
JR1 = 1.6 (kg.cm2)
• Secondary side rotation load inertia: JR2
This is the sum of the ball screw inertia JB and secondary side gear inertia. The ball screw is
generally calculated as a cylinder made of steel. Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for
load inertia calculation".
π·ρ·L 4 π × 7.80 × 10−3 × 100
JR2 = JB + 8.1 = 32 D + 8.1 = 32 × 44 + 8.1
= 19.6 + 8.1 = 27.7 (kg.cm2)
• Total rotation load inertia: JR
This is the sum of the primary side load inertia and secondary side load inertia. To convert the
secondary side load inertia to the motor shaft (primary side), multiply by the square of the
deceleration ratio.
2 4
JR = JR1 + ( 3 )2 × JR2 = 1.6 + 9 × 27.7 = 1.6 + 12.3 = 13.9 (kg.cm2)
A3 - 7
• Linear movement load inertia: JT

The inertia is calculated when a standard workpiece, tool, etc., is attached. The conversion to the
motor shaft by the deceleration ratio is included in the movement increment per motor rotation.
Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation".
∆S 10 × 2 2
JT = W . ( )2 = (400 + 10) . ( ) = 4.6 (kg.cm2)
20π 20π × 3
• Load inertia: JL
This is the sum of the total rotation load inertia and the linear movement inertia.
JL = 13.9 + 4.6 = 18.5 (kg.cm2)
When looking at the load inertia components, the linear movement weight tends to increase.
However, the rotation load generally accounts for most of the inertia. The load inertia does not
change much even if the workpiece weight changes greatly in the table axis.
(2) Obtaining unbalance torque

The unbalance torque is obtained from the moving object weight. Here, the drive system efficiency
is calculated as 1.
Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque".
(W 1 − W 2) · g · ∆S (410 − 0) × 9.8 × 10 × 2
TU = 3 = 3 = 4.3 (N.m)
2 × 10 π · η 2 × 10 π × 1 × 3
(3) Obtaining friction torque

The friction torque is obtained from the moving object weight and friction coefficient. Here, the drive
system efficiency is calculated as 1. Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load
torque".
F · ∆S µ · W · g · ∆S 0.02 × 410 × 9.8 × 10 × 2
TF = 3 = 3 = 3 = 0.09 (N.m)
2 × 10 π · η 2 × 10 π · η 2 × 10 π × 1 × 3
(4) Selecting the appropriate motor from the load inertia ratio
Because it is a machine tool, the HC Motor Series is required for the control precision, and a
motor maximum speed of 3000r/min. or more is required because of the rapid traverse speed and
gear ratio. Furthermore, the motor to be selected is limited to HC 3B Series because a motor with
a brake is required. Note that even when the motor has brakes, use the motor inertia for a motor
without brakes to judge the load inertia ratio.
The state is determined to be appropriate if the load inertia is within 3-fold of the recommended load
inertia for HC53B or larger capacity as shown below.
Motor inertia Load inertia Load inertia

Motor type Judgment
(kg.cm ) (kg.cm )
2 2
magnification
HC53B 6.6 18.5 2.80 {
HC103B 13.7 18.5 1.35 {
HC153B 20.0 18.5 0.93 {
A3 - 8
(5) Selecting the appropriate motor from the short time characteristics
(acceleration/deceleration time constant)
The acceleration/deceleration time constant is calculated using expression (a), and is judged
whether it satisfies the target acceleration/deceleration time constant of 120ms.
(JL + JM) × N (18.5 + 8.6) × 3000

HC53B : ta = = = 320.5 (ms)
95.5 × (0.8 × TMAX − TU − TF) 95.5 × (0.8 × 8.82 − 4.3 − 0.09)
(JL + JM) × N (18.5 + 15.7) × 3000

HC103B : ta = = = 119.9 (ms)
95.5 × (0.8 × TMAX − TU − TF) 95.5 × (0.8 × 16.7 − 4.3 − 0.09)
(JL + JM) × N (18.5 + 22.0) × 3000

HC153B : ta = = = 69.4 (ms)
95.5 × (0.8 × TMAX − TU − TF) 95.5 × (0.8 × 28.4 − 4.3 − 0.09)
The motors that satisfy the conditions from the calculation results above are the HC103B and
HC153B as shown below.
Acceleration/
Maximum torque Total inertia deceleration time
Motor type Judgment
(N.m) (kg.cm )
2
constant
[ms]
HC53B 8.82 27.1 320.5 ×
HC103B 16.7 34.2 119.9 {
HC153B 28.4 40.5 69.4 {
(6) Selecting the appropriate motor from the continuous characteristics

Generally, the state is calculated following the typical operation pattern. Because the Z axis is the
vertical axis here, the motor will be judged by the stopped torque during an upward stop.
The unbalance axis torque during a stop should be 60% or less of the stall torque (rated torque for
general-purpose motor). As shown in the following table, the only motor that satisfies this reference is
HC153B. From the judgment in steps (4) to (6) it is the appropriate motor with Z axis.
Stall
Motor Torque during stop Load rate
torque Judgment Explanation
TU+TF (kg.cm )
2
type (%)
(N.m)
HC53B 2.94 4.39 149.1 × An overload alarm occurs just by holding.
There is no allowance for an acceleration/
HC103B 5.88 4.39 74.6 ×
deceleration operation.
HC153B 8.82 4.39 49.8 { The torque during stop should be 60% or less.
A3 - 9
Appendix 3-3-2 Servo selection results
As a result of calculating the servo selection, the servo specifications for the Z axis of this machining
center have been determined.
Item Type
Servo drive unit MDS-C1-V1-20
Servomotor HC153B
The in the motor type will be decided based on separate machine specifications such as motor shaft
shape and absolute position system.
The following table shows the servo selections for all axes.
Item Unit X axis Y axis Z axis
Axis type Linear Linear Linear
Movement direction Horizontal Horizontal Vertical
Table support method Rolling Rolling Rolling
Table movement friction coefficient % 5 5 2
Ball screw diameter mm 40 40 40

Ball screw length mm 900 800 1000
Ball screw lead mm 10 10 10
Deceleration ratio 1 1 2/3
kg.cm
2
Primary side gear inertia − − 1.6
kg.cm
2
Secondary side gear inertia − − 8.1
Motor/ball screw connection section inertia .
kg cm
2
2.0 2.0 −
Weight of moving object installed on the
kg 500 400 400
machine (table, etc.)
Weight of standard-added-moving object
kg 100 100 10
(workpiece, etc.)
Rapid traverse rate mm/min 30000 30000 20000

Target acceleration/deceleration time
ms 120 120 120
constant
times/mi
Rapid traverse positioning frequency 20 20 20
n
Motor brake Without Without With
kg.cm
2
Motor shaft conversion rotation load inertia 19.6 17.7 13.9
Motor shaft conversion linear movement load
kg.cm
2
15.2 12.7 4.6
inertia
kg.cm
2
Motor shaft conversion total load inertia 34.8 30.4 18.5
Motor inertia .
kg cm
2
13.7 13.7 22.0
Motor shaft conversion load inertia
-fold 2.54 2.22 0.84
magnification
Motor shaft conversion unbalance torque N.m 0.0 0.0 4.3

Motor shaft conversion friction torque N .m 0.47 0.39 0.09
Motor shaft conversion total load torque N.m 0.47 0.39 4.39
Motor speed during rapid traverse r/min 3000 3000 3000

Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
ms 118.3 106.7 69.4
constant
Maximum torque during motor stop N.m 0.47 0.39 4.39
Maximum load rate during motor stop % 8.0 6.6 49.8
Servo drive unit type MDS-C1-V1-10 MDS-C1-V1-10 MDS-C1-V1-20

Servomotor type HC103 HC103 HC153B
A3 - 10
Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque
The calculation method for a representative load torque is shown.

Type Mechanism Calculation expression
TL =
F
.(
V F.∆S
N )=
2×103πη
3
2×10 πη
TL : Load torque (N.m)

F : Force in axial direction of the machine
that moves linearly (N)
η : Drive system efficiency
V : Speed of object that moves linearly (mm/min)
Z1 Fc N : Motor speed (r/min)
η F0 ∆S : Object movement amount per motor
Linear rotation (mm)
movement Servo- Z1, Z2 : Deceleration ratio
motor Z2 F in the above expression is obtained from the expression below
W
when the table is moved as shown on the left.
F = Fc + µ (W . g + F0)
Fc : Force applied on axial direction of moving section (N)
F0 : Tightening force on inner surface of table guide (N)
W : Total weight of moving section (kg)
g : Gravitational acceleration = 9.8 (m/s2)
µ : Friction coefficient
TLO Z1 1 1 1
TL = · · TLO + TF =
Z2 η n · η · TLO + TF
Rotary TLO : Load torque on load shaft (N.m)
movement TF : Motor shaft conversion load friction torque (N.m)
Z1 Z2 η : Drive system efficiency
Z 1, Z2 : Deceleration ratio
Servomotor n : Deceleration rate
When rising
TL = TU + TF
When lowering
2
TL = –TU · η + TF
Servomotor
TU : Unbalanced torque (N.m)
TF : Friction torque on moving section (N.m)
(W1 − W2) · g V (W1 – W2) · g ·∆S

1/n TU = 2 × 103πη ·( N )= 3
2 × 10 πη
Vertical µ · (W1 + W2) · g ·∆S

Counter- 3
movement weight
TF = 2 × 10 πη
Load W1 : Load weight (kg)

W2 W2 : Counterweight weight (kg)
W1
η : Drive system efficiency
g : Gravitational acceleration = 9.8 (m/s2)
V : Speed of object that moves linearly (mm/min)
N : Motor speed (r/min)
∆S : Object movement amount per motor rotation (mm)
µ : Friction coefficient
A3 - 11
Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation

The calculation method for a representative load inertia is shown.
Type Mechanism Calculation expression
D1.
π· ρ· L
Rotary
D2. JL = . (D14 – D24) = W . (D12 – D22)
shaft is 32 8
cylinder Reference data
center JL : Load inertia [kg.cm2] Material densities
ρ : Density of cylinder material [kg.cm ] Iron
3
–3 3
L : Length of cylinder [cm] ..... 7.80×10 [kg/cm ]
D1 : Outer diameter of cylinder [cm] Aluminum
–3 3
..... 2.70×10 [kg/cm ]
D2 : Inner diameter of cylinder [cm]
Copper
W : Weight of cylinder [kg] –3 3
..... 8.96×10 [kg/cm ]
Rotary shaft
Cylinder When rotary shaft and cylinder

shaft are deviated JL = W . (D + 8R )
2 2
R 8
JL : Load inertia [kg.cm2]

W : Weight of cylinder [kg]
D : Outer diameter of cylinder [cm]
R : Distance between rotary axis and
D cylinder axis [cm]
Rotary shaft
2 2
a +b
R
JL = W ( 3 + R2 )
b
Column a b
a
JL : Load inertia [kg.cm2]
W : Weight of cylinder [kg]
a.b.R : Left diagram [cm]
Rotary shaft
1 V 2 ∆S 2
JL = W ( · ) =W( )
N 2πN 10 20π
V
Object that JL : Load inertia [kg.cm2]
moves W : Weight of object that moves linearly [kg]
linearly Servo-
motor
N : Motor speed [r/min]
W V : Speed of object that moves linearly [mm/min]
∆S : Object movement amount per motor rotation [mm]
D 2
JL = W ( ) + JP
D 2
Suspended
object JL : Load inertia [kg.cm2]
W : Object weight [kg]
D : Diameter of pulley [cm]
JP : Inertia of pulley [kg.cm2]
W
Load B
N3 JB J31 JL = J11 + (J21 + J22 + JA) · ( N2 )2 + (J31 + JB) · ( N3 )2
N1 N1
J21
Converted
load Servomotor J22 JL : Load inertia [kg.cm2]
Load A N2 JA,JB : Inertia of load A, B [kg.cm2]
N1 JA J11~J31 : Inertia [kg.cm2]
N1~N3 : Each shaft’s speed [r/min]
J11 N1
A3 - 12
Appendix 3-4 Selecting the power supply

When selecting the power supply capacity, select the capacity that satisfies both the "Appendix 3-4-1
Rated capacity selection" and "Appendix 3-4-2 Momentary maximum rated capacity selection".
Appendix 3-4-1 Selecting according to the continuous rated capacity
Select the power supply capacity that satisfies the following conditions for the servomotor and spindle
motor to which the power is supplied.
(a) When there is only one servomotor axis

Power supply unit selection capacity ≥ ∑ (spindle motor output) + (servomotor output) ….. (1)
(b) When there are two or more servomotor axes

Power supply unit selection capacity ≥ ∑ (spindle motor output) + 0.7 × (servomotor output) ….. (2)
Selection capacity of power supply unit
MDS-C1-CV- 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370

Selection
4.2 6.0 8.0 11.5 15.5 19.0 23.0 27.0 31.0 38.0
capacity: (kW)
1. When no spindle motor is used, calculate as ∑ (spindle motor output) = 0kW.

2. "Spindle motor output" refers to the short time rated output (kW) of the
spindle motor.
3. If the spindle motor output in acceleration/deceleration is different from that in
steady state, substitute the larger value for "spindle motor output".
POINT 4. If the spindle motor output is limited, multiply the output value by the limit rate
and then substitute the multiplied value for "spindle motor output".
5. "Servomotor output" refers to the rated output (kW) of the servomotor. Note
that the servomotor rated output and the drive unit capacity are not always
the same.
(Example) MDS-C1-V1-35 + HC203…servomotor output = 2.0kW
1. When there are two or more servomotor axes, select the power supply unit
whose capacity is the same or larger than the largest rated capacity of the
loaded servomotors.
(Example) HC902(9.0kW) + HC102(1.0kW) … Select MDS-C1-CV-110.
2. If the selection capacity exceeds 38.0kW, use two or more power supply
CAUTION units. Select so that the capacity of each power supply unit satisfies the
expressions (1) and (2).
3. Only when MDS-B-SP-370 or larger capacity spindle drive unit is connected,
a large-capacity power supply unit (MDS-B-CVE-450, 550) can be used.
Refer to "Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit
Specifications" for details.
A3 - 13
Appendix 3-4-2 Selection with maximum momentary capacity
Select the capacity so that the total value of the total sum of maximum momentary output during spindle
motor acceleration and the total sum of maximum momentary output during acceleration of servomotor
that is accelerating and decelerating simultaneously is not more than the maximum momentary capacity
of the power supply unit.
Maximum momentary capacity of power supply unit ≥

Σ (Maximum momentary output of spindle motor)
+
Σ (Maximum momentary output of servomotor accelerating/decelerating simultaneously)
(1) Spindle motor maximum momentary output

The maximum momentary output of the spindle motor is calculated by multiplying the
acceleration/deceleration output of the spindle motor by 1.2.
Maximum momentary output of spindle motor = Spindle motor acceleration/deceleration output × 1.2
Spindle motor acceleration/deceleration output means the maximum output (kW) specified in the
acceleration/deceleration output characteristics. If there are no specifications in the
acceleration/deceleration output characteristics, maximum output (kW) of the short time rated output
specified at a time of 10 minutes or more and 30 minutes or less.
(2) Servomotor maximum momentary output

Selection capacity of power supply unit
Motor type HC52 HC102 HC152 HC202 HC352 HC452 HC702 HC902
Maximum
momentary output 1.5 2.7 4.5 5.3 7.4 10.6 15 19.5
(kW)
Motor type HC53 HC103 HC153 HC203 HC353 HC453 HC703

Maximum
momentary output 1.6 3.2 5.4 7.6 10.6 13.7 20.1
(kW)
Motor type HC103R HC153R HC203R HC353R HC503R

Maximum
momentary output 1.5 2.3 3.0 5.3 7.6
(kW)
Motor type HA053N HA13N HA23N HA33N HA-LF11K2-S8 HA-LF15K2-S8

Maximum
momentary output 0.15 0.3 0.6 1.1 21.7 30.6
(kW)
(Note) The maximum momentary output in this table is reference data for selecting the power supply
unit and is not data which guarantees the maximum output.
(3) Power supply unit maximum momentary capacity

Maximum momentary capacity of power supply unit
MDS-C1-CV- 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370

Maximum
momentary output 14 19 21 28 41 42 53 54 55 75
(kW)
1. If a spindle motor has a coil switch function, calculate with the specification of
the coil that has larger acceleration/deceleration output.
POINT 2. If a servomotor doesn’t accelerate/decelerate simultaneously with others,
even if its load is applied to the power supply, the motor can be excluded from
the selection.
A3 - 14
Appendix 3-4-3 Selection example
(Example 1) Spindle motor : 30-minute rated output 22kW × 1 axis

Servomotor : HC452 × 1 axis
HC352 × 2 axes
(The three servo axes are simultaneously accelerated/decelerated)
(1) Selection with rated capacity

Σ (Spindle motor output) + 0.7 x (servomotor output) = 22kW + 0.7 x (4.5kW + 3.5kW x 2) = 30.05kW
→"MDS-C1-CV-300" that has the selection capacity
of 31.0kW, or larger unit is required.
(2) Selection with maximum momentary rated capacity

+
= 22kW x 1.2 + (10.6kW + 7.4kW x 2) = 51.8kW
→"MDS-C1-CV-220" that has the maximum
momentary capacity of 53kW, or larger unit is
required.
(3) Overall selection

Select the power supply unit "MDS-C1-CV-300" that meets the conditions (1) and (2).
(Example 2) Spindle motor : 30-minute rated output 22kW × 1 axis

Servomotor : HC453 × 2 axes
HC353 × 1 axis
(The three servo axes are simultaneously accelerated/decelerated)
(1) Selection with rated capacity

Σ (Spindle motor output) + 0.7 x (servomotor output) = 22kW + 0.7 x (4.5kW x 2 + 3.5kW) = 30.75kW
→"MDS-C1-CV-300" that has the selection capacity
of 31.0kW, or larger unit is required.
(2) Selection with maximum momentary rated capacity

+
= 22kW × 1.2 + (13.7kW × 2 + 10.6kW) = 64.4kW
→"MDS-C1-CV-370" that has the maximum
momentary capacity of 75kW, or larger unit is
required.
(3) Overall selection

Select the power supply unit "MDS-C1-CV-370" that meets the conditions (1) and (2).
A3 - 15
Appendix 4-1 Explanation of large capacity spindle unit specifications.................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-1 Outline0 .....................................................................................................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-2 List of units ................................................................................................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-3 Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB .................................................A4-2
Appendix 4-1-4 Outline dimension drawings ......................................................................................A4-3
Appendix 4-1-5 Panel cut dimension drawing ....................................................................................A4-8
Appendix 4-1-6 Heating value ............................................................................................................A4-9
Appendix 4-1-7 Selecting the power capacity ....................................................................................A4-9
Appendix 4-1-8 Selecting the wire size ..............................................................................................A4-9
Appendix 4-1-9 Drive unit connection screw size.............................................................................A4-10
Appendix 4-1-10 Connecting each unit ............................................................................................A4-10
Appendix 4-1-11 Restrictions............................................................................................................A4-12
Appendix 4-1-12 Parameters............................................................................................................A4-14
Appendix 4-1-13 Precautions ...........................................................................................................A4-14
A4 - 1
Appendix 4-1 Explanation of large capacity spindle unit specifications
Appendix 4-1-1 Outline
The MDS-B-SP Series large capacity spindle unit (37KW, 45KW, 55KW) is an expanded capacity
version of the MDS-C1-SP Series standard spindle unit (30KW or less).
Additional items related to the increased capacity are explained in this section.
Appendix 4-1-2 List of units
<Power supply unit> <Spindle drive unit>

Capacity Weight Capacity Weight
Type Type
(kW) (kg) (kW) (kg)
B-CVE-450 45 20 B-SP-370 37 20
B-CVE-550 55 21 B-SP-450 45 21
B-SP-550 55 21
(Note) Use the MDS-C1-CV-370 for the power supply unit 37kW.
Appendix 4-1-3 Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB
Always mount the AC reactor and contactor shown below on the input side of each power supply unit
(B-CVE-450, 550).
(Note 1) Always mount one contactor for each power supply unit when using the MDS-B-CVE-450 or
550. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is omitted or shared with
another unit.)
(Note 2) Always mount one AC reactor for each power supply unit. The power supply unit could be
damaged if the AC reactor is omitted or shared.
The selection of the NFB when using only one power supply unit is shown below for reference.
Power supply unit type MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550

AC reactor (ordered part) B-AL-45K B-AL-55K
Recommended contactor
S-N150 S-N180
(special order part)
Recommended NFB
NF225CS3P-200A NF400CS3P-300A
(special order part)
(Note) Even when OFF, an earth leakage current of maximum 15mA flows at the coil connection
terminal MC1 for the power supply unit's external contactor. Thus, when using a contactor
other than that recommended above, do not use the contactor that can be turned ON at 15mA
or less or cannot be turned OFF at 15mA. When using a contactor with an internal electronic
circuit, consult with the contactor manufacturer and make sure that the contactor will operate
correctly even if an earth leakage current of 15mA or less flows.
A4 - 2
Appendix 4-1-4 Outline dimension drawings
The I bolt mounting hole is provided only at the top of the MDS-B-CVE-550 and MDS-B-SP-450, 550.
The I bolt (size: M10) is not enclosed and must be prepared by the user. Use an I bolt with a 13 to 25mm
long thread.
(1) MDS-B-CVE-450
180
21
10
18
AIR FLOW
178.5
339
360
380
344
Fin
L+ L+
L– L–
L11 L12 MC1
L21 L22 MC2

L1 L2 L3
10
18
20
4-ø6 hole
60 120 60 63 146 114
240
[Unit : mm]
A4 - 3
(2) MDS-B-CVE-550
64 2-M10 screw for I-bolt mounting

Only on top
180
20
10
18
AIR
FLOW
178.5
Fin
340
360
380
344
L+ L+
L–
L–
L11 L12 MC1

L21L22 MC2 L1 L2 L3
10
18
20
4-ø6 hole
60 180 60 63 146 120
300
[Unit : mm]
A4 - 4
(3) MDS-B-SP-370
180
10
18
21
AIR FLOW
178.5
Fin
339
360
380
344
L+
L–
L11 L21
U V W
10
18
20
4-ø6 hole
60 120 60 62 146 114
240
[Unit : mm]
A4 - 5
(4) MDS-B-SP-450/550
64
2-M10 screw for I-bolt mounting
Only on top
180
10
18
20
AIR
FLOW
178.5
Fin
360
380
344
340
L+
L–
L11 L21
U V W
10
18
4-ø6 hole 20
60 180 60 63 146 120
300
[Unit : mm]
A4 - 6
(5) AC reactor
1) 45kW 2) 55kW
(for wire 6-M10 screw

connection) MAIN (for wire
6-M6 screw connection)
D3±1
L11 L21 L31
MAIN
D
L12 L22 L32
(240)
D3±1.5
±2.5
M5 screw DRIVE M5 screw L11 L21 L31
FG connection FG connection L12 L22 L32
D
position position DRIVE
(with grounding mark) ±1

PE connection 70 4-8×15 slot 4-10×15 slot
position (mounting slot) (mounting slot)
Terminal cover
±1.5 PE connection
Terminal cover 200 position
(with grounding
mark)
175
145
190
215±2.5 220
±2.5
[Unit : mm] [Unit : mm]

Compatible power Compatible power
ACL type D3 D Weight ACL type D3 D Weight
supply unit supply unit
B-AL-45K MDS-B-CVE-450 120 160 12.8kg B-AL-55K MDS-B-CVE-550 200 320 10.0kg
A4 - 7
Appendix 4-1-5 Panel cut dimension drawing
Square Square
hole hole
8-M5 screw
Spindle drive unit mounting side Power supply unit mounting side
(Front view)
Unit [mm]
Power supply unit Spindle drive unit
Sym- Sym-
MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550 MDS-B-SP-370 MDS-B-SP-450 MDS-B-SP-550
bol bol
H 360±0.3 360±0.3 H 360±0.3 360±0.3 360±0.3
W 222±1 282±1 W 222±1 282±1 282±1
H1 341±1 341±1 H1 341±1 341±1 341±1
H2 10±0.5 10±0.5 H2 10±0.5 10±0.5 10±0.5
W1 120±0.3 180±0.3 W1 – – –
W2 – – W2 120±0.3 180±0.3 180±0.3
W3 51±0.5 51±0.5 W3 51±0.5 51±0.5 51±0.5
W4 18±0.5 18±0.5 W4 – – –
W5 120±0.5 120±0.5 W5 – – –
(Note 1) The spindle drive unit must be mounted to the left of the power supply unit looking from the
front of the unit. The panel must be cut taking this into consideration.
(Note 2) L+ and L– connection conductors are enclosed with the MDS-B-CVE-450 and 550 capacities,
so provide space between the units according to the dimensions shown above.
A4 - 8
Appendix 4-1-6 Heating value

Type Heating value (W) Type Heating value (W)
MDS-B-CVE-450 500 MDS-B-SP-370 850
MDS-B-CVE-550 600 MDS-B-SP-450 1000
MDS-B-SP-550 1200
(Note 1) The heating value is the value at the continuous rated output.
(Note 2) Use the following expressions as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when
mounting in an enclosed structure.
Unit Heating value outside panel

Heating value outside panel =
MDS-B-CVE-450, 550
(B-CVE heating value -30) × 0.75
Heating value outside panel =
MDS-B-SP-370, 450, 550
(B-SP heating value -40) × 0.75
Appendix 4-1-7 Selecting the power capacity
The power capacity required for the power supply unit is shown below.
Power supply unit type Power capacity (kVA)
MDS-B-CVE-450 63
MDS-B-CVE-550 77
Appendix 4-1-8 Selecting the wire size
(1) Recommended wire size for power lead-in wire

Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size as shown below using the power supply unit
capacity as a reference.
Recommended wire size for
Power supply unit type
power-lead-in wire
2
MDS-B-CVE-450 HIV60mm
2
MDS-B-CVE-550 HIV80mm
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire

Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size as shown below using the spindle drive unit
capacity as a reference.
Recommended wire size for spindle
Spindle drive unit type
motor output wire
2
MDS-B-SP-370 HIV50mm
2
2
(3) L+, L– link bar wire size

Power supply unit type L+, L– link bar wire size
MDS-B-CVE-450 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)
MDS-B-CVE-550 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)
(Note) The wire sizes above for the MDS-B-CVE-450/550 are the values when connecting to the
terminal section on the left front.
(4) L11, L21, MC1

Regardless of the spindle drive unit and power supply unit capacities, use an IV2mm2 or more wire
size.
A4 - 9
Appendix 4-1-9 Drive unit connection screw size

MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550 MDS-B-SP-450
Type MDS-B-SP-370
Left Right Left Right MDS-B-SP-550
L1, L2, L3 M8 M10 – –
U, V, W – – M8 M10
L+, L– M10 M6 M10 M6 M10 M10
L11, L21 M4 M4 M4 M4
MC1 M4 M4 – –
Appendix 4-1-10 Connecting each unit
(1) Wiring system

The wiring system is the same as the MDS-C1 Series. (Refer to the wiring system example below.)
Note that there are restrictions to the mounting and selection, so refer to the Restrictions given in
Section Appendix 5-1-11.
(a) When using MDS-C1-CV-370 or smaller
NC
MDS-B-SP(H) MDS-C1-CV
-260 to 370 MDS-C1-Vx
-370 to 550
CN2 CN9 CN1A

CN3 CN4 CN1B
CN9 CN1A
CN4 CN1B
To terminator or
battery unit
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN9
CN7
CN8
L+
L+ L+
L– L– L–
L11
L11
L11 L21 L21
MC1 L21
U V W
L1 L2 L3 U V W
MC Contactor
AC reactor
PLG
MAG B-AL
Blower
ENC Spindle motor
NFB
For motor blower NFB
Servomotor
3ø 200VAC 50Hz
3ø 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
A4 - 10
(b) When using MDS-B-CVE-450, 550
MDS-B-SP(H)-370 to 550 MDS-B-CVE-450 to 550 MDS-C1-Vx

NC
CN9 CN1A
CN4 CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
To terminator or
battery unit
CN4
CN9
CN4
CN9
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN6
Always use the link bar

enclosed with
CN7
CN8
MDS-B-CVE.
L+
L+
L–
L– L11
L11L12 MC1
Upper L21
step
L11L21 U V W L21L22 MC2
Lower
L1 L2 L3 U V W
step
Contactor
AC reactor
Servomotor
PLG B-AL
MAG
Blower
ENC Spindle motor
NFB
For motor blower NFB
3ø 200VAC 50Hz
3ø 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
(Note 1) Connect the L11, L21 and MC1 external connections without removing the conductors
connected between L21 and L22, L22 and MC2, and L11 and L12 of the MDS-B-CVE-450,
550.
(L12, L22 and MC2 are for special specifications, and normally, the external connection is not
required.)
(Note 2) Always connect the contactor to MC1 so that it can be controlled with the drive unit's internal
signal. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is turned ON and OFF with a
separate user-prepared sequence.
(Note 3) One end of the contactor coil is connected to the MC1 terminal and the other end is
connected to the power supply. The phase on the side connected to the power supply must
be different from the phase connected to the power supply unit's L21.
A4 - 11
Appendix 4-1-11 Restrictions
(1) Mounting
Always mount the MDS-B-SP-370,450, 550 on the left of the power supply unit.
When using MDS-B-CVE-450, 550, always use the enclosed link bar to connect L+ and L- on the
MDS-B-SP-370, 450, 550.
(a) Layout when connecting only one spindle drive unit to power supply unit.
Mount the power supply on the right and the spindle drive unit on the left.
Always cut the panel according to the panel cut dimension drawings shown in Appendix 5-1-5.
<Example 1>
MDS-B-SP-450 MDS-B-CVE-450
(b) Layout when connecting multiple drive units to a large capacity power supply unit
The following number of servo/spindle drive units can be additionally connected.
• When MDS-B-CVE-450 and MDS-B-SP-370 are combined, 9kW (=45kW–37kW+1kW)
worth of units.
worth of units.
worth of units.
In this case, arrange the MDS-B-SP-370, 450 to the left of MDS-B-CVE-450, 550 as shown in
the panel cut dimension drawings in Appendix 5-1-5. Mount the additional drive units to the
right of the MDS-B-CVE-450, 550.
If the spindle motor output differs from the spindle drive unit output, the above, excluding the
layout, may not always apply. (This is because the power supply unit's output is determined by
the motor output.)
<Example 2>
MDS-
MDS- MDS- C1-V1-45×2
B-SP-370 B-CVE-450 (2-axis)
A4 - 12
(2) Selection
(a) When using the MDS-B-CVE-450, 550, one of the B-SP-370, 450, 550 units must be selected
for the drive units connected to this power supply unit.
Only one MDS-B-SP-370, 450, 550 can be connected to one MDS-B-CVE-450, 550.
(b) When using MDS-B-SP-370, 450 or 550, the following power supply unit must be selected.
• When using MDS-B-SP-370: Select MDS-C1-CV-260 or more or MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550
Note that if the total of the servo/spindle motor output corresponds to the above power supply
unit with the normal selection method, that capacity power supply unit can be selected.
<Example 1> When using MDS-B-SP-370

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23kW or less: Select MDS-C1-CV-260
When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23.1kW or more: Select power supply unit with
normal selection method.


A4 - 13
Appendix 4-1-12 Parameters
The parameters added and changed in respect to the 30kW or smaller drive unit are shown below. The
parameters other than those shown below are the same as the 30kW or smaller capacity. For details on
the parameters, refer to "MDS-C1 SERIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL" (BNP-B2365)
Parameter Standard
No. Abbr. Details Setting range
name setting
Set the spindle drive unit's capacity type.
(HEX setting)
Setting Unit capacity Setting Unit capacity
0000 --- 0010 MDS-B-SP-550
0001 MDS-C1-SP-075 0011 ---
0002 MDS-C1-SP-15 0012 ---
0003 MDS-C1-SP-22 0013 ---
0004 MDS-C1-SP-37 0014 ---
0005 MDS-C1-SP-55 0015 ---
SP039 ATYP* Drive unit type 0006 MDS-C1-SP-75 0016 --- 0000 to FFFF 0000
0007 MDS-C1-SP-110 0017 ---
0008 MDS-C1-SP-150 0018 ---
0009 MDS-C1-SP-185 0019 ---
000A MDS-C1-SP-220 001A ---
000B MDS-C1-SP-260 001B ---
000C MDS-C1-SP-300 001C ---
000D MDS-B-SP-370 001D ---
000E MDS-B-SP-450 001E ---
000F MDS-C1-SP-04 001F ---
When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the

power supply are connected, setting below is
necessary.
To validate the external emergency stop function, add
40h.
(HEX setting)
External External
Power supply Unit capacity emergency emergency
SP041 PTYP* 0000 to FFFF 0000
type stop invalid stop valid
MDS-C1-CV-260 0126 0166
MDS-C1-CV-300 0130 0170
MDS-C1-CV-370 0137 0177
MDS-B-CVE-450 0145 0185
MDS-B-CVE-550 0155 0195
Parameters with an asterisk * in the abbreviation, such as ATYP*, are validated with the NC power
turned ON again.
Appendix 4-1-13 Precautions
After turning the power OFF, wait at least 15 seconds before turning it ON again.
If the power is turned ON within 15 seconds, the drive unit's control power may not start up correctly.
A4 - 14
Appendix 5-1 Transportation restrictions for lithium batteries..................................................................A5-2

Appendix 5-1-1 Target products .........................................................................................................A5-2
Appendix 5-1-2 Handling by user .......................................................................................................A5-3
Appendix 5-1-3 Regulations enforcement timing................................................................................A5-4
A5 - 1
Appendix 5-1 Transportation restrictions for lithium batteries

The United Nations Dangerous Goods Regulations "Article 12" became effective from 2003. When
transporting lithium batteries with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as by air transport,
measures corresponding to the Regulations must be taken. The UN Regulations classify the batteries
as dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods (Non Class 9) according to the lithium content.
To ensure safety during transportation, lithium batteries (battery unit) directly exported from Mitsubishi
are packaged in a dedicated container (UN package) for which safety has been confirmed. When the
customer is transporting these products with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as air transport,
the shipper must follow the details explained in section 2.
Appendix 5-1-1 Target products
The following Mitsubishi NC products use lithium batteries. The UN Regulations classify the batteries
as dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods (Non Class 9) according to the lithium content.
(Refer to the battery unit's rating nameplate or section "4-1-2 Battery option" for details on the lithium
content.) If the batteries subjected to hazardous materials are incorporated in a device and shipped, a
dedicated packaging (UN packaging) is not required. However, the item must be packed and shipped
following the Packing Instruction 912 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book.
Also, all lithium battery products incorporated in a machinery or device must be fixed securely in
accordance with the Packing Instruction 900 and shipped with protection in a way as to prevent damage
or short-circuits.
(1) Products requiring dedicated packaging (Class 9 materials)

Mitsubishi type Battery manufacturer type Battery manufacturer Battery class
MDS-A-BT-4 ER6-B4-11
MDS-A-BT-6 ER6-B6-11 Toshiba Battery Battery
MDS-A-BT-8 ER6-B8-11
CR23500SE-CJ5 CR23500SE Sanyo Battery Battery cell
(Note) The battery units labeled as "FCUA-" instead of "MDS-A-" also use the same battery.
(2) Products not requiring dedicated packaging (Non Class 9 materials)

Mitsubishi type Battery manufacturer type Battery manufacturer Battery class
MDS-A-BT-2 ER6-B2-12 Battery
FCU6-BTBOX 2CR5
- CR2450
Toshiba Battery
- CR2032
Battery cell
ER6V-C119B ER6V
MR-BAT A6-BAT
Q6BAT CR17335SE Sanyo Battery
(Note) Dedicated packaging is required if the shipment exceeds 24 cells/12 assembled batteries.
Package the batteries so that this limit is not exceeded.
Example) Rating nameplate for battery units
Mitsubishi type
Safety class
Battery manufacturer type
Lithium metal content
A5 - 2
Appendix 5-1-2 Handling by user
The following technical opinion is solely Mitsubishi's opinion. The shipper must confirm the latest IATA
Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Codes and laws and orders of the corresponding export country.
These should be checked by the company commissioned for the actual transportation.
IATA : International Air Transport Association

IMDG Code : A uniform international code for the transport of dangerous goods by seas
determined by IMO (International Maritime Organization).
(1) When shipping isolated lithium battery products (Packing Instruction 903)
(a) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging

The isolated battery's safety test and packaging specifications comply with the UN Regulations
(Packing Instruction 903). Thus, the user only needs to add the following details before shipping.
(Consult with the shipping company for details.)
1) Indication of container usage mark on exterior box (Label with following details recorded.)
• Proper shipping name (Lithium batteries)
• UN NO. (UN3090 for isolated battery, UN3091 for battery incorporated in a device or included)
• Shipper and consignee's address and name
Example of completing form
Shipper information Consignee information
2) Preparation of shipping documents (Declaration of dangerous goods)
(b) When packaged by user

The user must follow UN Regulations when packing, preparing for shipping and preparing the
indications, etc.
1) Packing a Class 9 lithium battery

• Consult with The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan for details on packaging.
• Prepare for shipping as explained in "1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging".
The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan

Headquarters Telephone: 03-3261-6611 Fax: 03-3261-6979
2) Packing a Non Class 9 lithium battery

• Cells and batteries are separated so as to prevent short circuits and are stored in a strong
outer packaging. (12 or less batteries, 24 or less cells.)
• Certificates or test results showing compliance to battery safety test.
The safety test results have been obtained from the battery manufacturer. (Consult with
Mitsubishi when the safety test results are required.)
• Prepare for shipping as explained in "1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging".
A5 - 3
(2) When shipping lithium batteries upon incorporating in a machinery or device

(Packing Instruction 900)
Pack and prepare for shipping the item in accordance with the Packing Instruction 900 specified in
the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book. (Securely fix the batteries that comply with the
UN Manual of Tests and Criteria to a machinery or device, and protect in a way as to prevent
damage or short-circuit.)
Note that all the lithium batteries provided by Mitsubishi have cleared the UN recommended safety
test; fixing the battery units or cable wirings securely to the machinery or device will be the user’s
responsibility.
Check with your shipping company for details on packing and transportation.
(3) When shipping a device with lithium batteries incorporated (Packing Instruction 912)
A device incorporating lithium batteries does not require a dedicated packaging (UN packaging).
However, the item must be packed, prepared for shipping and labeled following the Packing
Instruction 912 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book.
Check with your shipping company for details on packing and transportation.
The outline of the Packing Instruction 912 is as follows:
• All the items in the packing instructions for shipping the isolated lithium battery products
(Packing Instruction 903) must be satisfied, except for the items related to container,
short-circuit, and fixation.
• A device incorporating lithium batteries has to be stored in a strong water-proofed outer
packaging.
• To prevent an accidental movement during shipment, securely store the item in an outer
packaging.
• Lithium content per device should be not more than 12g for cell and 500g for battery.
• Lithium battery mass per device should be not more than 5kg.
Appendix 5-1-3 Regulations enforcement timing
The UN Regulations for each transportation method shall be enforced at the following timing.
Transportation method Enforcement timing

Air transport (ICAO/IATA) January 1, 2003
Sea transport January 1, 2004
Ground transport in Japan Timing not set; currently not subject to Regulations
Ground transport overseas Follows each country's regulations
United States : Scheduled in 2004
Europe : Scheduled in 2004
ICAO: International Civil Aviation Organization, IATA: International Air Transportation Association
<Reference>
Refer to the following materials for details on the regulations and responses.
Guidelines regarding transportation of lithium batteries and lithium ion batteries (Edition 2)
.......................................................... Battery Association of Japan
A5 - 4
Appendix 6-1 Compliance to EC Directives ...........................................................................................A6-2

Appendix 6-1-1 European EC Directives............................................................................................A6-2
Appendix 6-2-2 Cautions for EC Directive compliance .......................................................................A6-2
A6 - 1
Appendix 6-1 Compliance to EC Directives
Appendix 6-1-1 European EC Directives
In the EU Community, the attachment of a CE mark (CE marking) is mandatory to indicate that the basic
safety conditions of the Machine Directives (issued Jan. 1995), EMC Directives (issued Jan. 1996) and
the Low-voltage Directives (issued Jan. 1997) are satisfied. The machines and devices in which the
servo and spindle drive are assembled are the targets for CE marking.
(1) Compliance to EMC Directives

The servo and spindle drive are components designed to be used in combination with a machine or
device. These are not directly targeted by the Directives, but a CE mark must be attached to
machines and devices in which these components are assembled. The next section "EMC
Installation Guideline", which explains the unit installation and control panel manufacturing method,
etc., has been prepared to make compliance to the EMC Directives easier.
(2) Compliance to Low-voltage Directives

The MDS-C1 Series units are targeted for the Low-voltage Directives. An excerpt of the precautions
given in this specification is given below. Please read this section thoroughly before starting use.
A Self-Declaration Document has been prepared for the EMC Directives and Low-voltage
Directives. Contact Mitsubishi or your dealer when required.
Appendix 6-2-2 Cautions for EC Directive compliance
Use the Low-voltage Directive compatible parts for the servo/spindle drive and servo/spindle motor. In
addition to the items described in this instruction manual, observe the items described below.
(1) Configuration
Control panel
Drive unit
Electromagnetic
Isolating Circuit breaker contactor
transformer Motor
AC reactor
CB MC M
Use a type B (AC/DC detectable type) breaker
(2) Environment
Use the units under an Overvoltage Protection Category III and Pollution Class of 2 or less
environment as stipulated in IEC60664.
Install the servo/spindle drive unit in a control panel having a structure (IP54 or higher) in which
water, oil, carbon or dust cannot enter.
Drive unit Motor
During During During During
Storage Storage
operation transportation operation transportation
Ambient Ambient
0°C to 55°C –15°C to 70°C –15°C to 70°C 0°C to 40°C -15°C to 70°C -15°C to 70°C
temperature temperature
Humidity 90%RH or less 90%RH or less 90%RH or less Humidity 80%RH or less 90%RH or less 90%RH or less
Altitude 1000m or less 1000m or less 10000m or less Altitude 1000m or less 1000m or less 10000m or less
A6 - 2
(3) Power supply

1) If a control power supply of the drive unit is 200V, use the power supply under an Overvoltage
Protection Category II as stipulated in IEC60664. In that case, insert a star-connection
isolation transformer that is compliant with EN or IEC Standard into the primary input power
supply of the drive unit.
2) Do not omit the circuit breaker and electromagnetic contactor.
(4) Earthing
1) To prevent electric shocks, always connect the servo/spindle drive unit protective earth (PE)
terminal (terminal with mark) to the protective earth (PE) on the control panel.
2) When connecting the earthing wire to the protective earth (PE) terminal, do not tighten the wire
terminals together. Always connect one wire to one terminal.
PE terminal PE terminal
(5) Wiring
1) Always use crimp terminals with insulation tubes so that the connected wire does not contact
the neighboring terminals.
Crimp terminal
Insulation tube
Wire
2) Do not connect the wires directly.
A6 - 3
(6) Selecting the wire size for EC Directive compliance

To comply with the EC Directives, select the wire size from the following table using each drive
unit's capacity as a reference.
The wire types are as follow.
PVC : Polyvinyl chloride
EPR : Ethylene polyproprene
SIR : Silicon rubber
1) MDS-C1-CV (L1, L2, L3, PE) (The unit sizes are all mm2)
Type (MDS-C1-) CV-37 CV-55 CV-75 CV-110 CV-150 CV-185 CV-220 CV-260 CV-300 CV-370
PVC 2.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70
Wire EPR 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 35 50
SIR 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 16 25 25
Terminal screw size M4 M5 M8
2) MDS-C1-SP (U, V, W, PE)

Type (MDS-C1-) SP-04 SP-075 SP-15 SP-22 SP-37 SP-55 SP-75 SP-110 SP-150 SP-185 SP-220 SP-260 SP-300
PVC 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 70

Wire EPR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
SIR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 4 6 10 10 16 25
3) MDS-C1-V1/V2 (U, V, W, PE)

Type (MDS-C1-) V1-01 V1-03 V1-05 V1-10 V1-20 V1-35 V1-45 V1-70 V1-90 V1-110 V1-150
PVC 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 25 35
Wire EPR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 4 6 10 16 25
SIR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 4 10 16
4) Wire size for L11 and L21 link bar

Select a 1.5mm2 wire or larger regardless of the capacity. (This also applies to the wire
between NFB-L11 and L21.)
5) Wire size for L+ and L– link bar (For unified sizes)

Type (MDS-C1-) CV-37 CV-55 CV-75 CV-110 CV-150 CV-185 CV-220 CV-260 CV-300 CV-370
PVC 2.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 –
Wire EPR 1.5 2.5 4 10 16 25 35 35 70 70
SIR 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 10 10 16 25 35 35
Terminal screw size M6
* The wire sizes in the above table comply with EN60204 under the following conditions.
• Ambient temperature 40°C
• Wire laid along wall or in open cable tray
When using under other conditions, refer to EN60204 Appendix 5 and Appended Material C.
(7) Peripheral devices

1) Use EN/IEC Standards compliant parts for the no-fuse breaker and contactor.
A6 - 4
(8) Miscellaneous
1) Refer to "MDS-C1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL" for methods on complying with the EMC
Directives.
2) Ground the facility according to each country's requirements.
3) The control circuit connector ({) is safely separated from the main circuit ( ).
4) Inspect the appearance before installing the unit. Carry out a performance inspection of the
final unit, and save the inspection records.
Mitsubishi CNC MDS-C1-CV- MDS-C1-V2-
MDS-A-BT-
SV1, 2
(CSH21) CN1A CN1B
CN4 CN4
CN3M
Machine end
detector
CN9 CN9 CN3L
Machine end
detector
External emergency External brake CN20
stop input CN23 CN2L
output contact
CN2M
MU
No-fuse AC reactor Contactor
breaker MV Motor
R L1 Motor end
MW
detector
S L2 TE1
TE1 L+ L+
T L3 TE2 TE2
L– L–-
LU
MC MC1
L11 TE3 LV Motor
L11 TE3
L21 LW Motor end
L21 detector
: Main circuit
: Control circuit
Ground Ground Ground
A6 - 5
Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines
Appendix 7-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................A7-2

Appendix 7-2 EMC instructions ..............................................................................................................A7-2
Appendix 7-3 EMC measures ................................................................................................................A7-3
Appendix 7-4 Measures for panel structure ...........................................................................................A7-3
Appendix 7-4-1 Measures for control panel unit.................................................................................A7-3
Appendix 7-4-2 Measures for door .....................................................................................................A7-4
Appendix 7-4-3 Measures for operation board panel .........................................................................A7-4
Appendix 7-4-4 Shielding of the power supply input section..............................................................A7-4
Appendix 7-5 Measures for various cables ............................................................................................A7-5
Appendix 7-5-1 Measures for wiring in panel .....................................................................................A7-5
Appendix 7-5-2 Measures for shield treatment...................................................................................A7-5
Appendix 7-5-3 Servomotor power cable ...........................................................................................A7-6
Appendix 7-5-4 Servomotor feedback cable ......................................................................................A7-6
Appendix 7-5-5 Spindle motor power cable........................................................................................A7-7
Appendix 7-5-6 Spindle motor feedback cable...................................................................................A7-7
Appendix 7-6 EMC countermeasure parts .............................................................................................A7-8
Appendix 7-6-1 Shield clamp fitting ....................................................................................................A7-8
Appendix 7-6-2 Ferrite core ................................................................................................................A7-9
Appendix 7-6-3 Power line filter........................................................................................................A7-10
Appendix 7-6-4 Surge protector........................................................................................................A7-15
A7 - 1
Appendix 7-1 Introduction

EMC Instructions became mandatory as of January 1, 1996. The subject products must have a CE mark
attached indicating that the product complies with the Instructions.
As the NC unit is a component designed to control machine tools, it is believed to be out of the direct
EMC Instruction subject. However, we would like to introduce the following measure plans to backup
EMC Instruction compliance of the machine tool as the NC unit is a major component of the machine
tools.
(1) Methods for installation in control/operation panel

(2) Methods of wiring cable outside of panel
(3) Introduction of countermeasure parts
Mitsubishi is carrying out tests to confirm the compliance to the EMC Standards under the environment
described in this manual. However, the level of the noise will differ according to the equipment type and
layout, control panel structure and wiring lead-in, etc. Thus, we ask that the final noise level be
confirmed by the machine manufacturer.
These contents are the same as the EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES (BNP-B8582-45).
For measures for CNC, refer to "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" (BNP-B2230).
Appendix 7-2 EMC instructions

The EMC Instructions regulate mainly the following two withstand levels.
Emission ..... Capacity to prevent output of obstructive noise that adversely affects external
sources.
Immunity ..... Capacity not to malfunction due to obstructive noise from external sources.
The details of each level are classified as Table 1. It is assumed that the Standards and test details
required for a machine are about the same as these.
Table 1
Standards for
Generic
Class Name Details determining test
Standard
and measurement
Radiated noise Electromagnetic noise radiated through the air EN50081-2
Emission EN61800-3 EN55011
Conductive noise Electromagnetic noise discharged from power line (Industrial
environment)
Static electricity Example) Withstand level of discharge of
IEC61000-4-2
electrical discharge electricity charged in a human body.
Radiated magnetic Example) Simulation of immunity from digital
IEC61000-4-3
field wireless transmitters
Example) Withstand level of noise from relays or
Burst immunity IEC61000-4-4
connecting/disconnecting live wires EN61000-6-2
Conductive Example) Withstand level of noise entering EN61800-3
Immunity IEC61000-4-6
immunity through power line, etc. (Industrial
Power supply Example) 50/60Hz power frequency noise environment)
IEC61000-4-8
frequency field
Power dip Example) Power voltage drop withstand level
IEC61000-4-11
(fluctuation)
Example) Withstand level of noise caused by
Surge IEC61000-4-5
lightning
A7 - 2
Appendix 7-3 EMC measures

The main items relating to EMC measures include the following.
(1) Store the device in an electrically sealed metal panel.
(2) Earth all conductors that are floating electrically. (Lower the impedance.)
(3) Wire the power line away from the signal wire.
(4) Use shielded wires for the cables wired outside of the panel.
(5) Install a noise filter.
Ensure the following items to suppress noise radiated outside of the panel.
(1) Securely install the devices.
(2) Use shielded wires.
(3) Increase the panel's electrical seal. Reduce the gap and hole size.
Note that the electromagnetic noise radiated in the air is greatly affected by the clearance of the panel
and the quality of the cable shield.
Appendix 7-4 Measures for panel structure

The design of the panel is a very important factor for the EMC measures, so take the following measures
into consideration.
Operation board panel
Door
Control panel
Appendix 7-4-1 Measures for control panel unit
(1) Use metal for all materials configuring the panel.

(2) For the joining of the top plate and side plates, etc., mask the contact surface with paint, and fix with
welding or screws.
In either case, keep the joining clearance to a max. of 20cm for a better effect.
(3) Note that if the plate warps due to the screw fixing, etc., creating a clearance, noise could leak from
that place.
(4) Plate the metal plate surface (with nickel, tin) at the earthing section, such as the earthing plate.
(5) The max. tolerable hole diameter of the openings on the panel surface, such as the ventilation
holes, must be 3cm to 5cm. If the opening exceeds this size, use a measure to cover it. Note that
even when the clearance is less than 3cm to 5cm, noise may still leak if the clearance is long.
Example)
Painting mask
Max. joining
Hole exceeding clearance 20cm
3cm to 5cm Painting mask
∗ Provide electrical conductance
A7 - 3
Appendix 7-4-2 Measures for door
(1) Use metal for all materials configuring the door.

(2) Use an EMI gasket or conductive packing for the contact between the door and control panel unit.
(3) The EMI gasket or conductive packing must contact at a uniform and correct position of the metal
surface of the control panel unit.
(4) The surface of the control panel unit contacted with the EMI gasket or conductive packing must
have conductance treatment.
Example) Weld (or screw) a plate that is plated (with nickel, tin).
Control panel
EMI gasket
Packing
Door
Carry out conductance treatment on

sections that the EMI gasket contacts.
(5) As a method other than the above, the control panel unit and door can be connected with a plain
braided wire. In this case, the panel and door should be contacted at as many points as possible.
Appendix 7-4-3 Measures for operation board panel
(1) Always connect the operation board and indicator with an earthing wire.
(2) If the operation board panel has a door, use an EMI gasket or conductive packing between the door
and panel to provide electrical conductance in the same manner as the control panel.
(3) Connect the operation board panel and control panel with a sufficiently thick and short earthing
wire.
Refer to the "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" BNP-B2230 for the NC for more details.
Appendix 7-4-4 Shielding of the power supply input section
(1) Separate the input power supply section from other parts in the control panel so that the input
power supply cable will not be contaminated by radiated noise.
(2) Do not lead the power line through the panel without passing it through a filter.
Control panel Control panel
Drive unit Drive unit
Radiated
noise
Radiated
noise Shielding
plate
Power Power
Breaker AC input line filter Breaker AC input
line filter
The power supply line noise is eliminated Use a metal plate, etc., for the shielding
by the filter, but cable contains noise again partition. Make sure not to create a
because of the noise radiated in the control clearance.
panel.
A7 - 4
Appendix 7-5 Measures for various cables

The various cables act as antennas for the noise and discharge the noise externally. Thus appropriate
treatment is required to avoid the noise.
The wiring between the drive unit and motor act as an extremely powerful noise source, so apply the
following measures.
Appendix 7-5-1 Measures for wiring in panel
(1) If the cables are led unnecessarily in the panel, they will easily pick up the radiated noise. Thus,
keep the wiring length as short as possible.
Noise Noise
Device Device Device Device Device Device
(2) The noise from other devices will enter the cable and be discharged externally, so avoid internal
wiring near the openings.
Control panel Control panel
Device Device Device Device
Noise
(3) Connect the control device earthing terminal and earthing plate with a thick wire. Take care to the
leading of the wire.
Appendix 7-5-2 Measures for shield treatment

Common items
Use of shield clamp fittings is recommended for treating the shields. The fittings are available as options,
so order as required. (Refer to section "6.1 Shield clamp fitting".)
Clamp the shield at a position within 10cm from the panel lead out port.
1. When leading the cables, including the grounding wire (FG), outside of the
panel, clamp the cables near the panel outlet (recommendation: within
10cm).
2. When using a metal duct or conduit, the cables do not need to be clamped
POINT near the panel outlet.
3. When leading cables not having shields outside the panel, follow the
instructions given for each cable. (Installation of a ferrite core, etc., may be
required.)
A7 - 5
Appendix 7-5-3 Servomotor power cable

Control panel Earth with paint mask
Control panel
Conduit connector
Earth with P or U clip Cannon
Cannon connector To drive unit connector
To drive unit
Servomotor
Servomotor Conduit
Shield cable Cabtyre cable
Using shield cable Using conduit
(1) Use four wires (3-phase + earthing) for the power cable that are completely shielded and free from
breaks.
(2) Earth the shield on both the control panel side and motor chassis side.
(3) Earth the shield with a metal P clip or U clip.
(A cable clamp fitting can be used depending on the wire size.)
(4) Directly earth the shield. Do not solder the braided shield onto a wire and earth the end of the wire.
Solder
(5) When not using a shield cable for the power cable, use a conventional cabtyre cable. Use a metal
conduit outside the cable.
(6) Earth the power cable on the control panel side at the contact surface of the conduit connector and
control panel. (Mask the side wall of the control panel with paint.)
(7) Follow the treatment shown in the example for the conduit connector to earth the power cable on
the motor side. (Example: Use a clamp fitting, etc.)
Clamp fitting
To earthing
Conduit
Conduit connector Cannon connector
Appendix 7-5-4 Servomotor feedback cable

Control panel
Use a conventional batch shield pair
cable for the servomotor feedback
cable, and ground it in the NC side
(control panel).
Cannon connector
To drive unit
Batch shield pair cable
A7 - 6
Appendix 7-5-5 Spindle motor power cable

Control panel
Control panel Earth with paint mask
Conduit
Earth with connector Terminal
P or U clip Terminal box
box
To drive unit
To drive unit
Conduit
Spindle motor
Shield cable Cabtyre cable
Using shield cable Using conduit

(1) Use four wires (3-phase + earthing) for the power cable that are completely shielded and free from
breaks.
(2) Earth the shield in the same manner as the servomotor power cable.
(3) When not using a shield cable for the power cable, use a conventional cabtyre cable. Use a metal
conduit outside the cable.
(4) Earth the power cable on the control panel side at the contact surface of the conduit connector and
control panel side wall in the same manner as the servomotor power cable. (Mask the side wall of
the control panel with paint.)
(5) Earth at the conduit connector section in the same manner as the servomotor power cable.
Appendix 7-5-6 Spindle motor feedback cable
Control panel
Clamp the shield, and connect to
the connector case.
Terminal box
To drive unit
Spindle side connector

(State with the cover removed)
Batch shield pair cable
(1) Use a conventional batch shield pair cable for the spindle motor feedback cable.
Note) A shield for the spindle motor feedback cable is not "FG", and therefore do not ground it.
A7 - 7
Appendix 7-6 EMC countermeasure parts
Appendix 7-6-1 Shield clamp fitting
The effect can be enhanced by connecting the cable directly to the earthing plate. Install an earthing
plate near each panel's outlet (within 10cm), and press the cable against the earthing plate with the
clamp fitting. If the cables are thin, several can be bundled and clamped together. Securely earth the
earthing plate with the frame ground. Install directly on the cabinet or connect with an earthing wire.
Contact Mitsubishi if the earthing plate and clamp fitting set (AERSBAN- SET) is required.
View of clamp section
• Outline drawing
Note 1) Screw hole for wiring to earthing plate in cabinet.

Note 2) The earthing plate thickness is 1.6mm.
A B C Enclosed fittings L
AERSBAN-DSET 100 86 30 Clamp fitting A × 2 Clamp fitting A 70
AERSBAN-ESET 70 56 – Clamp fitting B × 1 Clamp fitting B 45
The shield of the spindle detector cable is not connected to the "FG"(Earth). Do
CAUTION not connect the cable shield to the earth by clamping the cable, etc.
A7 - 8
Appendix 7-6-2 Ferrite core
A ferrite core is integrated and mounted on the plastic case.

Quick installation is possible without cutting the interface cable or power cable.
This ferrite core is effective against common mode noise, allowing measures against noise to be taken
without affecting the signal quality.
Recommended ferrite core

TDK ZCAT Series
Shape and dimensions
ZCAT type ZCAT-A type

A D A E
B C B C
D
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
ZCAT-B type ZCAT-C type

A E A
C
D
B
D
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Unit [mm]
Applicable Recommended
Part name Fig. A B C D E Weight
cable outline ferrite core
1
ZCAT3035-1330 (-BK)* 1 39 34 13 30 --- 13 max. 63
ZCAT2035-0930-M (-BK) 2 35 29 13 23.5 22 10 to 13 29
ZCAT2017-0930-M (-BK) 3 21 17 9 20 28.5 9 max. 12
ZCAT2749-0430-M (-BK) 4 49 27 4.5 19.5 --- 4.5 max. 26
*1 A fixing band is enclosed when shipped.
ZCAT-B type: Cabinet fixed type, installation hole ø4.8 to 4.9mm, plate thickness 0.5 to 2mm
ZCAT-C type: Structured so that it cannot be opened easily by hand once closed.
A7 - 9
Appendix 7-6-3 Power line filter
(1) Power line filter for 200V

HF3000A-TM Series for 200V
Features
• 3-phase 3-wire type (250V series, 500V series)
• Compliant with noise standards German Official Notice Vfg243,
EU Standards EN55011 (Class B)
• Effective for use with IGBT inverter and MOS-FET inverter.
• Easy mounting with terminal block structure, and outstanding
reliability.
Application
• Products which must clear noise standards German Official
Notice Vfg243 and EU Standards EN55011 (Class B).
• For input of power converter using advanced high-speed power device such as IGBT MOS-FET.
Specifications (250V series)

HF3005A HF3010A HF3015A HF3020A HF3030A HF3040A HF3050A HF3060A HF3080A HF3100A HF3150A
Part name
-TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM
Rated voltage 250VAC
Rated current 5A 10A 15A 20A 30A 40A 50A 60A 80A 100A 150A
Leakage current 1.5mA MAX 250VAC 60Hz
Contact: Soshin Electric Co., LTD. Telephone: 03-3775-9112 (+81-3-3775-9112) http://www.soshin.co.jp
<Example of measuring voltage at noise terminal> ... Measured with IGBT inverter
German Official Notice Vfg243 measurement data EU Standards EN55011 (Class B)

measurement data
A7 - 10
<Typical characteristics>
40A item
<Circuit diagram>
(250V series) (500V series)
Outline dimensions
[ Unit : mm ]
Dimensions
Part name
A B C
HF3005A-TM
HF3010A-TM
180 170 130
HF3015A-TM
HF3020A-TM
HF3030A-TM
260 155 140
HF3040A-TM
HF3050A-TM 170
290 190
HF3060A-TM 230
HF3080A-TM
405 220
HF3100A-TM 210
HF3150A-TM 570 230
A7 - 11
200V MX13 Series 3-phase high attenuation noise filter
Features
• Perfect for mounting inside control panel:
New shape with uniform height and depth
dimensions
• Easy mounting and maintenance work:
Terminals are centrally located on the
front
• Complaint with NC servo and AC servo
noise:
High attenuation of 40dB at 150KHz
• Safety Standards:
UL1283, CSA22.2 No.8, EN133200
• Patent and design registration pending
Specifications
Type
MX13030 MX13050 MX13100 MX13150
Item
1 Rated voltage (AC) 3-phase 250VAC (50/60Hz)
2 Rated current (AC) 30A 50A 100A 150A
Test voltage (AC for one minute across
3 2500VAC (100mA) at 25°C, 70% RH
terminal and case)
Insulation resistance
4 100MΩ min. at 25°C, 70% RH
(500VDC across terminal and case)
5 Leakage current (250V, 60Hz) 3.5 mA max. 8 mA max.
6 DC resistance 30 mΩ max. 11 mΩ max. 5.5 mΩ max. 3.5 mΩ max.
7 Temperature rise 30°C max
8 Working ambient temperature –25°C to +85°C
9 Working ambient humidity 30% to 95% RH (non condensing)
10 Storage ambient temperature –40°C to +85°C
11 Storage ambient humidity 10% to 95% RH (non condensing)
12 Weight (typ) 2.8kg 3.9kg 11.5kg 16kg
(Note) This is the value at Ta≤50°C.

Refer to the following output derating for Ta>50°C.
Contact : Densei-lambda Co., Ltd. Telephone : 03-3447-4411 (+81-3-3447-4411)
Fax : 03-3447-7784 (+81-3-3447-7784)
http://www.densei-lambda.com
A7 - 12
Example of using MX13 Series

This is a noise filter with the same dimensions as MDS-D/DH drive unit depth (200mm) and height
(380mm). This unit can be laid out easily in the device by arranging it in a row with the servo unit.
As with the servo unit, the terminals are arranged on the front enabling ideal wire lead-out.
Refer to the following usage examples for details.
Wire to 3-phase power supply
Noise filter input terminal

200
380 Noise filter (MX13 Series)
Noise filter output terminal
Servo unit
Servo input terminal Wire from noise filter to servo
Example of noise terminal voltage attenuation

Noise terminal voltage
Noise terminal voltage
[dBuV]
[dBuV]
Frequency [MHz] Frequency [MHz]
EMI data for independent control panel EMI data for control panel + noise filter
(with six-axis servo unit mounted) (MX13030)
Output derating
Current (%)
Ambient temperature Ta (°C)
A7 - 13
Outline drawing
MX13030, MX13050
[ Unit : mm ]
MX13030 MX13050
A 66 81
B 45 55
C 10.5 13
D 50 67
E 13 16
F 10 13
G 177 179
H M4 screw M6 screw
I 70 85
J M4 screw M6 screw
K 195 200
MX13100, MX13150
[ Unit : mm ]
(Installation hole) (Installation hole)
MX13100 MX13150
A 130 165
B 90 110
C 20 27.5
D 115 150.5
E 37.5 57.5
F 18 23
G 174 176
H M6 screw M8 screw
I 21 27
J 37.5 56.5
K 115 149.5
L 276 284
A7 - 14
Appendix 7-6-4 Surge protector
Insert a surge protector in the power input section to prevent damage to the control panel or power
supply unit, etc. caused by the surge (lightning or sparks, etc.) applied on the AC power line.
Use a surge protector that satisfies the following electrical specifications.
(1) Surge protector for 200V
R•A•V BYZ series for 200V
Maximum Surge Surge
Circuit voltage tolerable Clamp voltage withstand withstand Electrostatic Service
Part name
50/60Hz Vrms circuit (V) ±10% level voltage capacity temperature
voltage 8/20µs (A) 1.2/50µs (V)
RAV-781BYZ-2 3AC 250V 300V 783V 2500A 20kV 75pF -20 to 70°C
(Note) Refer to the manufacturer's catalog for details on the surge protector's characteristics and specifications, etc.
Outline dimension drawings Circuit diagram
11 1
(1) Black (2) Black (3) Black

5.5 1
28.5 1
UL-1015 AWG16
30
0
200
4.5 0.5
28 1
41 1
unit: mm
R•A•V BXZ series for 200V

Maximum Surge Surge
Circuit voltage tolerable Clamp voltage withstand withstand Electrostatic Service
Part name
50/60Hz Vrms circuit (V) ±10% level voltage capacity temperature
voltage 8/20µs (A) 1.2/50µs (V)
RAV-781BXZ-4 3AC 250V 300V 1700V 2500A 2kV 75pF -20 to 70°C
(Note) Refer to the manufacturer's catalog for details on the surge protector's characteristics and specifications, etc.
Outline dimension drawings Circuit diagram
11 1
(1)Black (2)Black (3)Black U Green

5.5 1
28.5 1
UL-1015 AWG16
30
0
200
4.5 0.5
28 1
41 1
unit: mm
A7 - 15
(2) Example of surge protector installation

An example of installing the surge protector in the machine control panel is shown below.
A short-circuit fault will occur in the surge protector if a surge exceeding the tolerance is applied.
Thus, install a circuit protection breaker in the stage before the surge protector. Note that almost no
current flows to the surge protector during normal use, so a breaker installed as the circuit
protection for another device can be used for the surge protector.
Transformer Breaker
NC unit
Other device
(panel power
supply, etc.)
Contactor
Control panel
Panel earth MC (relay panel,
Factory leakage etc.)
power breaker Breaker AC reactor Power supply
Input unit and
power drive unit
supply
Other device
(panel power
supply, etc.)
Breaker
(1) Surge protector

(Protection across phases)
(2) Surge protector

B (Protection across each phase's grounding)
Grounding
Grounding plate
Installing the surge absorber
1. The wires from the surge protector should be connected without extensions.
2. If the surge protector cannot be installed just with the enclosed wires, keep
the wiring length of A and B to 2m or less. If the wires are long, the surge
CAUTION protector's performance may drop and inhibit protection of the devices in the
panel.
3. The selected surge protector differs according to the input power voltage.
A7 - 16
Appendix 8. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard
Appendix 8 Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard.............................. A8-2
A8 - 1
Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard
The instruction of UL/c-UL listed products is described in this manual.

The descriptions of this manual are conditions to meet the UL/c-UL standard for the UL/c-UL listed
products. To obtain the best performance, be sure to read this manual carefully before use.
To ensure proper use, be sure to read specification manual, connection manual and maintenance
manual carefully for each product before use.
1. UL/c-UL listed products

[CNC system]
Unit name Unit part number
NC control panel FCU6-MU [*1]-[*2], FCU6-MA [*1]-[*2]
FCU6-DU [*39][*40], FCU6-YZ [*39][*40]
Display unit FCUA-LD [*41], FCUA-CT [*41], FCUA-CR [*41]
Keyboard unit FCU6-YZ [*39][*40], FCU6-TZ [*39][*40]
FCU6-KB0 [*42], FCUA-KB [*42]
Base I/O unit FCU6-DX [*3], HR377, HR378, HR353
Remote I/O unit FCUA-DX [*4]
I/O module HR357, HR371, QY231
[AC servo/spindle system]

Unit name Unit part number
Power supply unit MDS-B-CVE- [*5], MDS-C1-CV-[*5]
MDS-B-V1- [*6], MDS-B-V14- [*6], MDS-C1-V1- [*6]
Servo drive unit MDS-B-V2- [*7], MDS-B-V24- [*7], MDS-C1-V2- [*7]
MDS-B-SVJ2- [*8]
Spindle drive unit MDS-B-SP [*38]-[*9], MDS-C1-SP [*38]-[*9]
Option unit MDS-B-PJEX
Battery unit FCU6-BT4D1
HA-FF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]
HC-MF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]
Servo motor HC-SF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]
HC-RF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]
HC [*20][*11][*21][*14][*22]-[*23][*24]
SJ [*25][*26][*27]-[*28][*29][*30][*31]-[*32]
Spindle Motor
SJ [*33][*26][*28][*34][*35][*36][*37][*31]
Suffixes listed below may be attached to the above part numbers at portions marked with [*]. For details regarding specifications,
see the specification manuals for each product.
[*1] 011, 013, 021, 031, 032, 515, 516, 517, 535, 536
[*2] 12, 23
[*3] 210, 211, 220, 221, 310, 311, 320, 321, 330, 331, 340, 341, 350, 351, 410, 411, 420, 421, 430, 431, 440, 441, 450, 451
[*4] 100, 101, 110, 111, 120, 121, 130, 131, 140, 141
[*5] 37, 55, 75, 110, 150, 185, 220, 260, 300, 370,(450, 550: Only MDS-B Series)
[*6] 01, 03, 05, 10, 20, 35, 45S, 45, 70, 90, 110, 150
[*7] 0101, 0301, 0303, 0501, 0503, 0505, 1003, 1005, 1010, 2010, 2020, 3510S, 3510, 3520S, 3520, 3535, 4520, 4535, 4545,
7035, 7045, 7070S, 7070
[*8] 01, 03, 04, 06, 07, 10, 20
[*9] 04, 075, 15, 22, 37, 55, 75, 110, 150, 185, 220, 260, 300, 370, (450,550:Only MDS-B Series)
[*10] 05, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 35
[*11] 1, 2, 3 [*12] None, C
[*13] None, P, N, I, E [*14] None, B
[*15] None, Gn, GnH (n = serial number) [*16] None, K, D, X, T
[*17] None, Wn (n = serial number) [*18] None, UL, UE
[*19] None, Sn (n = serial number) [*20] 5, 10, 15, 20, 35, 45, 70
[*21] None, R [*22] S, T
[*23] E, A [*24] 1, 2, 33, 42, 51
[*25] NL, PF, PL, V, VL [*26] None, K
[*27] None, S [*28] Two digits decimal two digits
[*29] 01 - 99 [*30] None, F, G, Y, Z
[*31] None, M [*32] None, S01 - S99
[*33] None, N, P [*34] A, B, L, M, N, X
[*35] None, 1 - 9, A - F [*36] None, D, H, P, Z
[*37] None, B, C, F, G, R [*38] None, H, M, X, HX, MX
[*39] T, C, N [*40] 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36
[*41] 10, 100, 120 [*42] 05, 06, 10, 13, 14, 20, 30
A8 - 2
2. Operation surrounding air ambient temperature

The recognized operation ambient temperature of each units are as shown in the table below. The
recognized operation ambient temperatures are the same as an original product specification for all of
the units.
Operation ambient
Classification Unit name
temperature
NC control panel 0 to 55°C
Base I/O unit 0 to 55°C
CNC system
Remote I/O unit 0 to 55°C
I/O module 0 to 55°C
Power supply unit 0 to 55°C
AC Servo drive unit 0 to 55°C
servo/spindle Spindle drive unit 0 to 55°C
system Option unit, Battery unit 0 to 55°C
Servo motor, Spindle Motor 0 to 40°C
3. Notes for CNC system

3.1 Selection of external power supply unit
An UL recognized 24Vdc output power supply unit should be used to CNC system.
The “PD25” power supply unit provided by Mitsubishi will be changed to UL recognized product since
September 2000.
4. Notes for AC servo/spindle system

4.1 General Precaution
It takes 10 minutes to discharge the bus capacitor.
When starting wiring or inspection, shut the power off and wait for more than 15 minutes to avoid a
hazard of electrical shock.
4.2 Installation
MDS-B/C1 Series have been approved as the products, which have been installed in the electrical
enclosure. The minimum enclosure size is based on 150 percent of each MDS-B/C1 unit combination.
And also, design the enclosure so that the ambient temperature in the enclosure is 55°C (131°F) or less,
refer to the manual book
4.3 Short-circuit ratings

Suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering, it is not more than 5kA rms symmetrical amperes.
A8 - 3
4.4 Peripheral devices

To comply with UL/c-UL Standard, use the peripheral devices, which conform to the corresponding
standard.
• Circuit Breaker, Fuses, Magnetic Contactor and AC Reactor

Applicable power Fuse Magnetic AC Reactor
Circuit Breaker
supply unit Class K5 contactor (AC3) BKO-NC6851-
MDS-B-CVE-37
NF50 40A 70A S-N25 H11 (B-AL-7.5K)
MDS-C1-CV-37
MDS-B-CVE-55
NF50 40A 100A S-N25 H11 (B-AL-7.5K)
MDS-C1-CV-55
MDS-B-CVE-75
NF50 40A 100A S-N25 H11 (B-AL-7.5K)
MDS-C1-CV-75
MDS-B-CVE-110
NF50 50A 100A S-N35 H12 (B-AL-11K)
MDS-C1-CV-110
MDS-B-CVE-150
NF100 100A 200A S-N50 H13 (B-AL-18.5K)
MDS-C1-CV-150
MDS-B-CVE-185
NF100 100A 200A S-N50 H13 (B-AL-18.5K)
MDS-C1-CV-185
MDS-B-CVE-220
NF225 150A 200A S-N80 H14 (B-AL-30K)
MDS-C1-CV-220
MDS-B-CVE-260
NF225 150A 300A S-N80 H14 (B-AL-30K)
MDS-C1-CV-260
MDS-B-CVE-300
NF225 150A 300A S-N80 H14 (B-AL-30K)
MDS-C1-CV-300
MDS-B-CVE-370
NF225 175A 300A S-N150 H15 (B-AL-37K)
MDS-C1-CV-370
MDS-B-CVE-450 NF225 200A S-N150 H16 (B-AL-45K)
MDS-B-CVE-550 NF400 300A S-N180 H17 (B-AL-55K)
• Circuit Breaker for spindle motor Fan

Select the Circuit Breaker by doubling the spindle motor fan rated.
A rush current that is approximately double the rated current will flow, when the fan is started.
<Notice>
• For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.
• For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
4.5 Flange of servo motor

Mount the servomotor on a flange, which has the following size or produces an equivalent or higher heat
dissipation effect:
Flange size Servo Motor
(mm) HC HC-RF HC-MF HA-FF HC-SF
150x150x6 --- --- Under 100W Under 100W ---
250x250x6 --- --- 200W 200,300W ---
250x250x12 0.5 to 1.5kW 1.0 to 2.0kW 400W 400,600W 0.5 to 1.5kW
300x300x12 --- --- 750W --- ---
300x300x20 2.0 to 7.0kW --- --- --- 2.0 to 7.0kW
4.6 Motor Over Load Protection

Servo drive unit MDS-B-V1/2/14/24 Series and MDS-C1-V1/2 series and spindle drive unit MDS-B-SP
and MDS-C1-SP series have each solid-state motor over load protection.
When adjusting the level of motor over load, set the parameter as follows.
A8 - 4
4.6.1 MDS-B-V1/2/14/24, MDS-C1-V1/2 Series
Parameter Parameter Parameter Standard Setting

Setting Procedure
No. Abbr. Name Setting Value Range
SV021 OLT Overload Set the time constant for overload 60s 1 to 300s
Time constant detection. (Unit: 1 second.)
SV022 OLL Overload Set the overload current detection level 150% 1 to 500%
Detection level with a percentage (%) of the stall rating.
4.6.2 MDS-B-SP, MDS-C1-SP Series
Parameter Parameter Parameter Standard Setting

Setting Procedure
No. Abbr. Name Setting Value Range
SP063 OLT Overload Set the time constant for overload 60s 0 to 1000s
Time constant detection. (Unit: 1 second.)
SP064 OLL Overload Set the overload current detection level 110% 1 to 200%
Detection level with a percentage (%) of the rating.
4.7 Field Wiring Reference Table for Input and Output

Use the UL-approved Round Crimping Terminals to wire the input and output terminals of MDS-B
Series.
Crimp the terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer.
Following described crimping terminals and tools type are examples of Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg.
Co., Ltd.
4.7.1 Power Supply Unit (MDS-B-CVE, MDS-C1-CV Series)
Capacity [kW] 3.7 to 7.5 11.0 to 18.5 22.0 to 37.0 45.0 55.0
P, N
M6 M6 M6 M6, M10
(L+, L-)
Screw Torque
44.3/5.0 49.6/5.6 49.6/5.6 49.6/5.6, 177/20
[lb in/ N m]
L11, L21, MC1
Terminal M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
(R0, S0)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
17.4/2.0 14.2/1.6 14.2/1.6 14.2/1.6 14.6/1.6
[lb in/ N m]
L1, L2, L3 M4 M5 M8 M8 M10
Screw Torque
14.6/1.6 29.8/3.37 117.2/13.2 117.2/13.2 177/20
[lb in/ N m]
P, N (L+, L-)
Capacity [kW] 3.7, 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5, 22.0
Wire Size (AWG) #10/60°C #8/60°C #4/60°C #4/60°C #3/60°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #12/75°C #10/75°C #8/75°C #4/75°C #4/75°C
Crimping Terminals R8-6 R22-6
R5.5-6 R22-6
Type R5.5-6 R8-6
YHT-8S YPT-60
Crimping Tools Type YHT-2210 YPT-60
YHT-2210 YHT-8S
Capacity [kW] 26.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0

Wire Size (AWG) #1/60°C The bus bar is attached
#1/75°C #1/0/75°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #3/75°C to the product.
Crimping Terminals 38-S6 L330T
38-S6
Type R22-6 459-12
YET300
Crimping Tools Type YPT-60
YF-1
A8 - 5
L11, L21 (R0, S0), MC1

Capacity [kW] 3.7 to 55.0
Wire Size (AWG) #14/ 60°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #14/ 75°C
Crimping Terminals
V2-4
Type
Crimping Tools Type YNT-1614
L1, L2, L3
Capacity [kW] 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5
Wire Size (AWG) #10/60°C #10/60°C #4/60°C #3/60°C
#10/75°C #3/75°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #12/75°C #10/75°C #4/75°C #4/75°C
Crimping Terminals
5.5-S4 L300T 459-23
Type
Crimping Tools Type YHT-2210 YPT-60
Earth Wire Size #10/60°C #10/60°C #4/60°C #3/60°C
#10/75°C #3/75°C
(AWG) #10/75°C #10/75°C #4/75°C #4/75°C
Capacity [kW] 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0

Wire Size (AWG) #1/60°C #1/0/60°C #2/0 #3/0
#1/75°C 1/0/75°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #2/75°C #1/75°C /75°C /75°C
L330T
Crimping Terminals L330T
38-S8 459-12 38-S8 70-8 R80-10
Type 459-12
38-S8
YET300
YET300
Crimping Tools Type YPT-60 YF-1 YPT-60 YTP-150
YF-1
YPT-60
Earth Wire Size #3/60°C #1/60°C #1/0
#3/75°C 1/75°C #1/75°C
(AWG) #3/75°C #3/75°C /75°C
4.7.2 Servo Drive Unit (MDS-B-V1/2/14/24, MDS-C1-V1/2 Series)
Axis 1-axis (V1, V14) 2-axes (V2, V24)

11.0,
Capacity [kW] 0.1 to 3.5 4.5 to 9.0 0.1+0.1 to 7.0+7.0
15.0
P, N
M6 M6 M6 M6
(L+, L-)
Screw
Torque 44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0
[lb in/ N m]
L11, L21
Terminal M4 M4 M4 M4
(R0, S0)
Screw
Screw
Size
Torque 17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0
[lb in/ N m]
U, V, W M4 M5 M8 M4
Screw
Torque 14.6/1.6 28.6/3.2 117.2/13.2 14.6/1.6
[lb in/ N m]
P, N (L+, L-)
Wire size depends on the Power Supply Unit (MDS-B-CVE, MDS-C1-CV Series).
L11, L21 (R0, S0)

Capacity [kW] 0.1 to 15.0
Wire Size (AWG) #14/ 60°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #14/ 75°C
Crimping Terminals
V2-4
Type
A8 - 6
U, V, W
Capacity [kW] 0.1 to 1.0 2.0 3.5 4.5
R8-5
R5.5-4 8-4
Crimping Terminals (8-4)
R2-4
Type R5.5-5
T2-4 R5.5-4
(R5.5-4)
YHT-8S
Crimping Tools Type YHT-2210
YHT-2210
Earth wire Size #14/60°C #10/60°C #8/60°C #8/60°C
(AWG) #14/75°C #12/75°C #10/75°C #10/75°C
Capacity [kW] 7.0 9.0 11.0 15.0

Crimping Terminals R8-5
R8-5 R22-8 R38-8
Type (8-4)
Crimping Tools Type YHT-8S YPT-60
Earth Wire Size #8/60°C #8/60°C #4/60°C #3/60°C
(AWG) #8/75°C #8/75°C #4/75°C #3/75°C
4.7.3 Spindle Drive Unit (MDS-B-SP, MDS-C1-SP Series)
Capacity [kW] 0.4~3.7 5.5~18.5 22.0~30.0 37.0 45.0/55.0

P, N
M6 M6 M6 M10 M10
(L+, L-)
Screw
Torque 44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0 234.3/26.5 177/20
[lb in/ N m]
L11, L21
Terminal M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
(R0, S0)
Screw
Screw
Size
Torque 17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0 17.2/2.0
[lb in/ N m]
U, V, W M4 M5 M8 M8 M10
Screw
Torque 14.6/1.6 28.6/3.2 117.2/13.2 88.5/10.0 177/20
[lb in/ N m]
P, N (L+, L-)
Wire size depends on the Power Supply Unit (MDS-B-CVE, MDS-C1-CV Series).
L11, L21 (R0, S0)

Capacity [kW] 0.4~55.0
Wire Size (AWG) #14/60°C
/Temp Rating Note 1 #14/75°C
Crimping Terminals
V2-4
Type
A8 - 7
U, V, W
Capacity [kW] 0.4, 0.75 1.5 2.2, 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
Wire Size (AWG) #14/60°C #10/60°C #10/60°C #8/60°C #8/60°C #4/60°C
/Temp Rating
#14/75°C #14/75°C #12/75°C #10/75°C #8/75°C #4/75°C
Note 1
Crimping 5.5-S4 R5.5-4 R8-5 L330T
R2-4 R5.5-5 R8-5
Terminals Type R2-4 R5.5-5 459-23
Crimping Tools YHT-8S
YHT-2210 YHT-8S YPT-60
Type YHT-2210
Earth Wire Size #14/60°C #11/60°C #10/60°C #8/60°C #8/60°C #4 /60°C
(AWG) #14/75°C #14/75°C #10/75°C #10/75°C #8/75°C #4 /75°C
Capacity [kW] 18.5 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0

Wire Size (AWG) #3/60°C #2/60°C #1/60°C
#2/0 #4/0
/Temp Rating #1/75°C #1/0/75°C
#4/75°C #3/75°C #2/75°C 75°C /75°C
Note 1
22-S6
Crimping
L330T R38-8 R60-8 70-10 R100-10
Terminals Type
459-23
Crimping Tools YET300
YPT-60 YPT-150
Type YF-1
Earth Wire Size #3/60°C #3/60°C #3/0
#3/75°C #1/75°C #1/75°C
(AWG) #4/75°C #3/75°C /75°C
Note 1: 60°C: Polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (IV)

75°C: Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (HIV)
Use copper wire only.
Above listed wire are for use in the electric cabinet on machine or equipment.
A8 - 8
4.8 Spindle Drive / Motor Combinations

Following combinations are the Standard combinations
Rating Output (kW)

Of Applicable Spindle Motor
Drive Unit Note: 1 SJ- ( ) Series
SJ-N Series
SJ-V/VL Series
SJ-NL Series
Note: 2
MDS-B-SP []-04
0.2
MDS-C1-SP []-04
MDS-B-SP []-075
0.75
MDS-C1-SP []-075
MDS-B –SP []-15
1.5
MDS-C1-SP []-15
MDS-B –SP []-22
2.2 2.2
MDS-C1-SP []-22
MDS-B –SP []-37
3.7 3.7
MDS-C1-SP []-37
MDS-B-SP []-55
5.5 5.5
MDS-C1-SP []-55
MDS-B-SP []-75 5.5
7.5
MSD-C1-SP []-75 7.5
5.5
MDS-B-SP []-110
7.5 11
MDS-C1-SP []-110
11
7.5
MDS-B-SP []-150
11
MDS-C1-SP []-150
15
11
MDS-B-SP []-185
15
MDS-C1-SP []-185
18.5
11
MDS-B-SP []-220 15
MDS-C1-SP []-220 18.5
22
11
15
MDS-B-SP []-260
18.5
MDS-C1-SP []-260
22
26
15
18.5
MDS-B-SP []-300
22
MDS-C1-SP []-300
26
30
15
18.5
22
MDS-B-SP [] –370
26
30
37
22
26
MDS-B-SP [] -450 30
37
45
30
37
MDS-B-SP [] -550
45
55
Note1: [] can be H, M, X, HX, MX or none.

Note2: Applicable unit depends on the range of power constant of motor.
Inquire of Mitsubishi about the detail of the combinations.
A8 - 9
5. AC Servo/Spindle System Connection

MDS-C1-V1/V2 Series
MDS-C1-SP[H][M][X] Series MDS-C1-CV Series
MDS-B-V1/V2 Series
MDS-B-SP[H][M][X] Series MDS-B-CVE Series
MDS-B-V14/V24 Series
CN1A CN1B CN1A CN1B
From NC
Regarding the connection of NC, CN9 CN4 CN9 CN4 CN4
see the NC manual book.
CN2LCN3L CN5 CN6 CN9 Battery Unit

or
CN2 CN3M CN7 CN8 Terminator A-TM
L+/L-
L11/L21
MC1
MU/MV/MW
U/V/W CN23 L1/L2/L3

LU/LV/LW
External Emergency Stop MC

MC
Contactor Fuse or
Breaker
AC-L
3 phase
AC reactor 200/220VAC
Circuit Breaker
Enclosure Side
Machine Side
Servo Motor Spindle Motor
Encoder FAN
Encoder and
Thermal Protection
Servo Motor
Encoder
A8 - 10
Appendix 9-1 Outline of China Compulsory Product Certification System ............................................A9-2

Appendix 9-2 First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification.......................A9-2
Appendix 9-3 Precautions for Shipping Products...................................................................................A9-3
Appendix 9-4 Application for Exemption ................................................................................................A9-4
Appendix 9-5 Mitsubishi NC Product Subject to/Not Subject to CCC Certification................................A9-5
A9 - 1
Appendix 9-1 Outline of China Compulsory Product Certification System

The Safety Certification enforced in China included the "CCIB Certification (certification system based
on the "Law of the People’s Republic of China on Import and Export Commodity Inspection" and
"Regulations on Implementation of the Import Commodities Subject to the Safety and Quality Licensing
System" enforced by the State Administration of Import and Export Commodity Inspection (SACI) on
import/export commodities, and the "CCEE Certification" (certification system based on "Product
Quality Certification Management Ordinance" set forth by the China Commission for Conformity
Certification of Electrical Equipment (CCEE) on commodities distributed through China.
CCIB Certification and CCEE Certification were merged when China joined WTO (November 2001),
and were replaced by the "China Compulsory Product Certification" (hereinafter, CCC Certification)
monitored by the State General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine
(AQSIQ) of the People's Republic of China.
The CCC Certification system was partially enforced from May 2002, and was fully enforced from May
2003. Target commodities which do not have CCC Certification cannot be imported to China or sold in
China. (Indication of the CCIB or CCEE mark has been eliminated from May 1, 2003.)
CCIB : China Commodity Inspection Bureau
CCEE : China Commission for Conformity Certification of Electrical Equipment
CCC : China Compulsory Certification
Appendix 9-2 First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product

Certification
The First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification, covering 132 items (19
categories) based on the CCIB products (104 items), CCEE products (107 items) and CEMC products
(Compulsory EMC Certification products) was designated on December 3, 2001.
Class Product catalogue Class Product catalogue
1 Electric Wires and Cables (5 items) 5 Electric tools (16 items)
2 Switches, Installation protective and connection devices (6 items) 6 Welding machines (15 items)
3 Low-voltage Electrical Apparatus (9 items) Compulsory Certification 7 Household and similar (18 items)
Regulations electrical appliances
Circuit-breakers (including RCCB, RCBO, MCB) 8 Audio and video equipment (16 items)
Low-voltage switchers 9 Information technology (12 items)
(disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, and equipment
fuse-combination devices. 10 Lighting apparatus (2 items)
11 Telecommunication terminal (9 items)
equipment
Other protective equipment for circuits 12 Motor vehicles and Safety (4 items)
(Current limiting devices, circuits protective Parts
devices, over current protective devices, 13 Tyres (4 items)
thermal protectors, over load relays,
14 Safety Glasses (3 items)
low-voltage electromechanical contactors and
motor starters) 15 Agricultural Machinery (1 item)
CNCA -01C -011: 2001
Relays (36V < Voltage ≤ 1000V) 16 Latex Products (1 item)
(Switch and Control
Other switches Equipment) 17 Medical Devices (7 items)
(Switches for appliances, vacuum switches, CNCA -01C -012: 2001 18 Fire Fighting Equipment (3 items)
pressure switches, proximity switches, foot (Installation Protective 19 Detectors for Intruder Alarm (1 item)
switches, thermal sensitive switches, hydraulic Equipment) Systems
switches, push-button switches, position limit
switches, micro-gap switches, temperature
sensitive switches, travel switches,
change-over switches, auto-change-over
switches, knife switches)
Other devices
(contactors, motor starters, indicator lights,
auxiliary contact assemblies, master
controllers, A.C. Semiconductor motor
controllers and starters)
Earth leakage protectors
Fuses
Low-voltage switchgear CNCA-01C-010:2001
(Low-voltage
switchgear)
4 Small power motors (1 item) CNCA-01C-013:2001
(Note) (Small power motors)
(Note) When the servomotor or the spindle motor of which output is 1.1kW or less (at 1500 r/min) is used,
NC could have been considered as a small power motor. However, CQC (China Quality
Certification Center) judged it is not.
A9 - 2
Appendix 9-3 Precautions for Shipping Products

As indicated in Appendix 7-2, NC products are not included in the First Catalogue of Products subject to
Compulsory Product Certification. However, the Customs Officer in China may judge that the product is
subject to CCC Certification just based on the HS Code.Note 2
NC cannot be imported if its HS code is used for the product subject to CCC Certification. Thus, the
importer must apply for a "Certification of Exemption" with CNCA.Note 3 Refer to Appendix 7-4.
Application for Exemption for details on applying for an exemption.
(Note 1) The First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification (Target HS
Codes) can be confirmed at http://www.cqc.com.cn/Center/html/60gonggao.htm.
(Note 2) HS Code: Internationally unified code (up to 6 digits) assigned to each product and used for
customs.
(Note 3) CNCA: Certification and Accreditation Administration of People's Republic of China
(Management and monitoring of certification duties)
A9 - 3
Appendix 9-4 Application for Exemption

Following "Announcement 8" issued by the Certification and Accreditation Administration of the
People's Republic of China (CNCA) in May 2002, a range of products for which application for CCC
Certification is not required or which are exempt from CCC marking has been approved for special
circumstances in production, export and management activities.
An application must be submitted together with materials which prove that the corresponding product
complies with the exemption conditions. Upon approval, a "Certification of Exemption" shall be issued.
<Range of products for which application is exempt>

Range of products not (a) Items brought into China for the personal use by the foreign embassies, consulates, business
requiring application agencies and visitors
(Excluding products purchased from Service Company for Exporters)
(b) Products presented on a government-to-government basis, presents
(c) Exhibition products (products not for sale)
(d) Special purpose products (e.g., for military use)
Products not requiring application for CCC Certification are not required to be CCC marked or
certified.
Range of products for (e) Products imported or manufactured for research and development and testing purposes
which application is (f) Products shipped into China for integration into other equipment destined for 100% re-export to a
exempted destination outside of China
(g) Products for 100% export according to a foreign trade contract (Excluding when selling partially in
China or re-importing into China for sales)
(h) Components used for the evaluation of an imported product line
(i) The products imported or manufactured for the service (service and repairs) to the end-user. Or the
spare parts for the service (service and repairs) of discontinued products.
(j) Products imported or manufactured for research and development, testing or measurements
(k) Other special situations
The following documents must be prepared to apply for an exemption of the "Import Commodity Safety
and Quality License" and "CCC Certification".
(1) Formal Application

(a) Relevant introduction and description of the company.
(b) The characteristics of the products to be exempted.
(c) The reason for exemption and its evidence (ex. customs handbook).
(d) The name, trademark, quantity, model and specification of the products to be exempted.
(Attach a detail listing of these items for a large quantity of products. When importing materials
for processing and repair equipments, submit a list of the importing materials for each month
and repair equipments.)
(e) Guarantee for the safety of the products; self-declaration to be responsible for the safety during
the manufacturing and use.
(f) To be responsible for the authenticity and legitimacy of the submitted documents. Commitment
to assist CNCA to investigate on the authenticity of the documents (When CNCA finds it
necessary to investigate on the authenticity of the documents.)
(2) Business license of the company (Copy)

(3) Product compliance declaration
Indicate which standard’s requirements the products comply with or submit a test report (Copy is
acceptable. The report can be prepared in a manufacturer’s laboratory either at home or overseas.)
(4) Import license (Only if an import license is needed for this product. Copy is acceptable.)
(5) Quota certificate (Only if a quota certificate is needed for this product. Copy is acceptable.)
(6) Commercial contract (Copy is acceptable.)
(7) If one of item (4), (5) or (6) cannot be provided, alternative documents, such as bill of lading, the
invoice, and other evidential documents must be submitted.
A9 - 4
Appendix 9-5 Mitsubishi NC Product Subject to/Not Subject to CCC Certification

The state whether or not Mitsubishi NC products are subject to the CCC Certification is indicated below,
based on the "First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification" issued by the
State General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine (AQSIQ) of the
People's Republic of China and the Certification and Accreditation Administration of the People's
Republic of China (CNCA) on July 1, 2002.
Judgment on whether or not subject to

Model China HS Code (Note 1)
CCC Certification
Power supply unit 85044090
Not subject to CCC Certification
Servo/spindle drive unit 85371010
85015100
Servo/spindle Not subject to CCC Certification
85015200
NC – Not subject to CCC Certification
Display unit – Not subject to CCC Certification
(Note 1) The China HS Code is determined by the customs officer when importing to China. The
above HS Codes are set based on the HS Codes used normally when exporting from Japan.
(Note 2) Reference IEC Standards are used as the actual IEC Standards may not match the GB
Standards in part depending on the model.
Whether or not the NC products are subject to CCC Certification was judged based on the following five
items.
(a) Announcement 33 (Issued by AQSIQ and CNCA in December 2001)

(b) HS Codes for the products subject to CCC Certification (Export Customs Codes)
* HS Codes are supplementary materials used to determine the applicable range. The applicable
range may not be determined only by these HS Codes.
(c) GB Standards (This is based on the IEC Conformity, so check the IEC. Note that some parts are
deviated.)
(d) Enforcement regulations, and products specified in applicable range of applicable standards within
(e) "Products Excluded from Compulsory Certification Catalogue" (Issued by CNCA, November 2003)
Reference
• Outline of China's New Certification System (CCC Mark for Electric Products), Japan Electrical
Manufacturers' Association
• Outline of China's New Certification System (CCC Mark for Electric Products) and Electric
Control Equipment, Nippon Electric Control Equipment Industries Association
A9 - 5
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
May 2004 BNP-C3040B First edition created.

Dec. 2004 BNP-C3040D Section 1-2-3 IPM spindle motor series type SJ-PMF07030-00 was deleted.
Section 1-2-5 Compatible NFB (Mitsubishi) type was changed.
Section 2-2-1 [HP] items were deleted from the list of specifications.
Section 2-2-1 CAUTION "When replacing the SJ-V series by the conventional
SJ series, the shorter L dimension is applied." was added.
Section 2-2-2 Output characteristics charts were sorted by the motor types.
Section 2-3-4 List of specifications for AC reactor was added.
Section 2-3-6(2) Spindle D/A output No.6 to 13 were revised, and No.125 to 127
were deleted.
Section 2-4 Newly added.
Section 3-1-5 Cable for magnetic brake was added.
Section 3-1-5(1) A part of descriptions was corrected.
Section 3-2-2 Spindle motor SJ-PMF07030-00 was deleted from Shaft
characteristics.
Section 3-3-3 "Stall rated current" was corrected to "stall current" in the servo
overload protection characteristics charts.
Section 4-1 Explanation on the system configuration in the full closed loop
control and the synchronous control was added.
Section 4-1-2(3) Brake connector type was deleted. Configuration of the entire
connection diagram was changed.
Section 4-1-4(1) SIN wave was changed to analog wave.
Section 4-1-5 Detector conversion unit's output voltage class "2Vp-p" was
deleted.
Section 4-2-1 The section of "Gap between magnet and sensor" was deleted.
Section 4-2-1 The section of "Magnet and sensor installation directions" was
deleted.
Section 4-2-1(2) Corrected font size for the dimension B's error allowance
indications in the magnet outline dimension drawing.
Section 4-2-2 Detector type "RFH-1024-22-1M-68(-8)" was changed to
"OSE-1024-3-15-68(-8)".
Section 4-2-2 Handling of the spindle detector was deleted.
Section 4-2-3 C axis detector (OSE90K) was added.
Section 4-2-4 C axis detector (MBE90K) was added.
Section 4-2-5 C axis detector (MHE90K) was added.
Section 4-2-6(2) Outline drawing No. was deleted from the list of specifications.
Section 4-2-7(1) "Motor built-in PLG" was changed to "Motor end PLG" in the list
of specifications.
Section 4-3-1(1) Brake connector was added in the cable connection diagram.
Section 4-3-1(3) Connector for motor brake: CNU20S(AWG14) was added.
A note requesting the user to prepare linear scale cable was
added.
Section 4-3-2 CNL3 and CNLH3 cables were deleted.
CNP67A cable drawing was corrected.
Section 4-3-2 C axis detector (OSE90K,MBE90K,MHE90K,OSE90K with
1024p output) cable was added.
Section 4-3-2 Power cables and connector sets for MDS-B-PJEX unit were
added.
Section 5-1 Selecting the wire size for EC Directive compliance was move to
Appendix 6.
Section 5-2-1 Notes under the selection table were corrected.
Section 5-3 Recommended main circuit NFB (Special order part) type was
changed.
Section 5-4 Rush current waveform chart was corrected. Example of
selecting a breaker was deleted.
Section 5-5 Recommended devices and contact information was added.
Section 5-6 Specifications for surge absorber selection was changed.
Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Section 5-8 Cable for external emergency stop was added.
Appendix 1 Section titles were created for each servomotor series, spindle
motor series and unit type.
Appendix 1-3 The section of "Unit outline dimension drawings" was newly
created. Titles were given for each unit.
Appendix 1-3-1,2 Dimensions were added for the L+,L-,L11,L21 terminal blocks.
M6, M8 screws were changed to the hexagonal type.
Appendix 1-3-3 Outline dimension drawing for AC reactor was added to
Appendix 1-3-3.
Appendix 2-1 Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable was added.
Appendix 2-1 Cables for servo brake and external emergency stop were
added.
Appendix 2-2 FCUA-R220 cable connection diagram was added.
Appendix 2-2 Descriptions for power supply and GND signal were corrected.
CAUTION was added to the section of "Spindle detector cable
connection diagram".
Appendix 3-2-1 Criteria for judging load inertia ratio were added to POINT.
Appendix 4 Overall modification and correction were made to the
descriptions, charts, and drawings in this chapter.
Appendix 5 The order of sections was rearranged with new information
added. Types of lithium batteries were added. Enforcement
timing was changed.
Appendix 6-1-1 Descriptions were corrected in "(1) Compliance to EMC
Directives", "(2) Environment" and "(3) Power supply".
Correction was made in the list of wire size of the item (6).
Appendix 7-5-4 Items related to installing the servomotor feedback cable was
corrected.
Appendix 7-5-6 Items related to installing the spindle motor feedback cable was
corrected.
Appendix 7-6-1 CAUTION was added.
Appendix 7-6-3 Modified across the board.
Appendix 9 Appendix 9 "Compliance with China Compulsory Product
Certification (CCC Certification) System" was added.
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without
written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
MODEL MDS-C1 Series

MODEL
CODE 008-305
Manual No. BNP-C3040D(ENG)

Specifications subject to change without notice.
(0412) MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.

MDS-C1 Series SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL bnp-c3040 (Eng) D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MDS-C1 Series SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL bnp-c3040 (Eng) D

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MDS-C1 Series SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL bnp-c3040 (Eng) D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC

Notes on Reading This Manual

When there is a potential risk of fatal or serious injuries if

When operator could be fatally or seriously injured if handling

When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken

Wiring, maintenance and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician.

Do not stack the products above the tolerable number.

Do not get on top of or place heavy objects on the unit.

Always observe the installation directions.

When installing a coupling to a servomotor shaft end, do not apply an impact by

Store the motor in the package box.

Do not directly connect a commercial

to observe this could result in a fault. COM COM

When using an inductive load such as a

(4) Usage methods

the magnetic brakes to be operated Servomotor

Always turn the input power OFF when an alarm occurs.

(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspections.

Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Do not disassemble the servo drive unit or servomotor parts.

Dispose of the battery according to local laws.

(8) General precautions

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 2. Table and Connector Specifications

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

Appendix 7. EMS Instruction Guidelines

Appendix 8. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard..................................................... A8-2

1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration .......................................................................................... 1-2

1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration

1-1-1 System configuration

To 2nd and 3rd

Servomotor Spindle motor

Magnesensor or spindle detector

1-1-2 Unit outline type

Fin Fin Fin

Outline H:380 H:380 H:380

W:90 W:120 W:150

(For customers switching from MDS-A/B Series)

1-2 Explanation of type

1-2-1 Servomotor type

Motor series Rated output capacity Type

(Note 1) The standard type complied with EN Standards and UL Standards.

(1) HC, HC R Series

HC (1) (2) (3) (4) - (5)

(4) Protective structure

(3) Shaft end structure

(1) Rated output and rated rotation speed

(2) HA N Series

SERVO MOTOR ASSY

Serial No. SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 9706

HA (1) N (2) (3) (4) - (5)

(4) Protective structure

(3) Shaft end structure

(2) Magnetic brakes

(1) Rated output and rated rotation speed

(3) HA-LF Series

SERVO MOTOR ASSY

(1) HC, HCR Series

(2) HAN Series

HCR Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

HAN Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)